Advanced Search

Law on higher education and scientific research

Original Language Title: Wet op het hoger onderwijs en wetenschappelijk onderzoek

Subscribe to a Global-Regulation Premium Membership Today!

Key Benefits:

Subscribe Now for only USD$40 per month.

Law of 8 October 1992, laying down provisions relating to higher education and scientific research

We Beatrix, at the grace of God, Queen of the Netherlands, Princess of Orange-Nassau, etc. etc. etc.

All of them, who will see or hear these, saluut! do know:

In this regard, we considered that it would be desirable, in order to strengthen the quality, innovative capacity and social orientation of the system of higher education and scientific research, to improve the quality of the system and to improve the quality of life. increase the independence of the institutions and, to that end, revise the allocation of powers to the State authorities and the institutions concerned;

whereas it is further desirable that the administrative relations which the State authorities maintain with those institutions are as closely aligned as possible;

that it would be desirable to combine the separate arrangements in the field of the order of higher education and scientific research into a Law on higher education and scientific research ;

In this way, we, the Council of State, and with the mean consultations of the States-General, have been well-regarded and understood to be right and to be understood by the following:

Chapter 1. General provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 1. Definitions and terms of reference

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.1. Conceptual provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

For the purpose of this Act:

  • a. Our Minister: Our Minister of Education, Culture and Science and, as far as it concerns education and research in the field of agriculture and natural environment, Our Minister of Economic Affairs;

  • b. higher education: scientific education and higher vocational education;

  • (c) Scientific education: education designed to prepare for the self-employment of science or the professional application of scientific knowledge, and to promote the understanding of the cohesion of the sciences;

  • d. higher vocational education: education aimed at the transfer of theoretical knowledge and the development of skills in close connection with professional practice;

  • e. initial education: higher education as intended in Article 7.3a ;

  • f. institution: an institution or legal person referred to in Article 1.2 ;

  • g. higher education institution: an institution as referred to in Article 1.2 (a) , or a legal person for higher education;

  • h. public institution: an institution based on a legal person governed by public law;

  • (i) special institution: an institution based on a legal person having full jurisdiction;

  • j. setting-board:

    • -of a funded institution: the college of directors, unless otherwise specified;

    • -from a legal person with full jurisdiction to provide accredited training: the body designated as such in the statutes;

  • (k) period of study shall mean the period starting on 1 September and ending on 31 August of the following year;

  • l. inspection: the inspection, intended to be carried out in the Educational supervision law ;

  • m. training: a bachelor 's degree or a master' s degree as intended in Article 7.3 for which accreditation has been granted or which has received a positive new training test;

  • n. dual training: an education as referred to in Article 7.7, second paragraph ,

  • o. Faculty of Medicine: the faculty in which the training courses for the profession of doctor are established;

  • p. accreditation body: the Dutch-Flemish Accreditation Organisation referred to in Article 1 of the Accreditation Convention;

  • q. accreditation: the quality mark which expresses the positive assessment of the quality of an education by the accreditation body;

  • (r) New training test: the mark which expresses the positive assessment of the quality of a proposed training by the accreditation body;

  • s. 'quality assurance' means the quality mark which expresses the internal quality assurance and the commitment to improve the results of an institution of higher education in so far as it relates to the quality of its quality. training courses have been positively assessed by the accreditation body;

  • t visitation group: training that corresponds to an educational basis;

  • u. study point: a study point within the meaning of Article 7.4, first paragraph ;

  • v. Accreditation Convention: the Treaty establishing the Hague, adopted on 3 September 2003, between the Kingdom of the Netherlands and the Flemish Community of Belgium on the accreditation of training within the Dutch and Flemish higher education (Trb). 2003, 167);

  • w. Ad program: the program, intended in Article 7.8a, first paragraph ;

  • x. New Ad Programme key: the key which expresses the positive assessment of the quality of a new ad programme;

  • x1. Personal number: civil service number as intended in Article 1 (b) of the general provisions Act civil service number -or the teaching number issued by Our Minister, referred to in Article 7.31d, third paragraph ;

  • x2 basic register education: basic register education as intended Article 24b of the Law on Education Supervision ;

  • y. College of directors:

    • -of a special institution: the institution of the institution designated as such in the statutes;

    • -of a public institution: the institution of the institution empowered by this law to do so;

  • z. degree: a degree as intended in Article 7.10a , Article 7.10b or Article 7.18 ;

  • aa. Legal person for higher education: a legal person with full jurisdiction providing initial training with the exception of the State or an institution or a legal person with full jurisdiction that is in post-initial training Master training with the exception of the State;

  • Bb. Public body BES: public body Bonaire, Sint Eustatius or Saba.


Article 1.1a. WHW Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This law shall also apply in the public sector BES.


Article 1.2. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This law applies to:

  • a. the Article 1.8 referred to as universities, colleges, the Open University, and the philosophical universities of the world,

  • (b) Legal persons for higher education with full jurisdiction providing initial training with the exception of the State and legal persons with full jurisdiction providing post-initial master training with the exception of the State,

  • c. the Article 1.13, first paragraph , referred to as academic hospitals; and

  • d. the Royal Dutch Academy of Arts and Sciences in Amsterdam and the Royal Library in The Hague.


Article 1.3. Higher education institutions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Universities are focused on taking care of scientific education and conducting scientific research. In each case, they provide initial training in scientific education, carry out scientific research, provide training to scientific research or technology designer, and carry out knowledge of the necessary training. of the society.

  • 2 Philosophical Universities are aimed at providing scientific education for a life-based function or profession. They conduct scientific research in the field of life, provide training to scientific researcher and provide knowledge for the benefit of society.

  • 3 Colleges are focused on providing higher vocational education. They shall carry out design and development activities or research in the field of professional practice. In any case, they provide undergraduate training in higher vocational education, they provide master training courses in higher vocational training, and in any case they gain knowledge of for the benefit of society. They contribute to the development of professions to which education is addressed.

  • 4 The Open University is focused on taking care of scientific education and higher vocational education, it, in accordance with the profile of the Open University, perform scientific research and research focused on the in the case of professional practice, as well as the provision of a contribution to the renewal of higher education. In any event, it shall provide initial training. It takes care of these in the form of distance learning.

  • 5 Universities, philosophical universities, colleges and the Open University are also paying attention to personal development and to the promotion of social responsibility. They focus on the promotion of expression in Dutch as part of their work in the field of education in the field of education in Dutch-speaking students.


Article 1.4. Academic Hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Academic hospitals are employed in the field of patient care and assist in the provision of scientific medicine and research at the universities to which they are affiliated. They also carry out top clinical and top reference functions in health care. In addition, they shall cooperate in the training of medical specialists.

  • 3 Supporting pupils referred to in paragraph 2 may, in agreement between the educational provision and the school in which the pupil is enrolled, include teaching of the pupil.

  • 4 The academic hospital, the legal person who maintains the educational provision referred to in the second paragraph, and the staff of the educational provision are required to give the inspection, give all the information requested concerning the support for education, referred to in the second and third paragraphs.


Article 1.5. Scientific research institutes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences is active in the field of scientific research. In any event, it shall promote exchanges of views and information between its members and between these members and other scientific and scientific bodies, shall advise our Minister, on request, or on his own initiative. matters in the field of scientific practice and shall promote scientific practice by carrying out or doing work in that field.

  • 2 The Royal Library is as the national library working in the field of library and information care, both for the benefit of higher education and scientific research and for the benefit of public administration and the exercise of occupation or business. In this context, it shall in any event ensure the national collection of libraries, promote the establishment and maintenance of national provisions in the area mentioned above, and shall facilitate the coordination with the other scientific community institutions. libraries.


Article 1.6. Academic freedom

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Academic freedom shall be respected in respect of the institutions.


Article 1.7. Ethics guidelines

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution board shall adopt guidelines on ethical aspects relating to the work of the institution. It shall not adopt those directives than after having obtained the opinion of a committee set up for that purpose. Where animals are used for the purposes of the institution or people for tests or demonstrations or tests, they shall be subject to the Directives in this field.


Title 1a. Space for innovation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.7a. Space for innovation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 In case of application of the first paragraph, the general measure of management shall, in any event, determine:

    • a. the purpose of the experiment,

    • b. how the articles of the chapters, titles or paragraphs referred to in paragraph 1 of the first paragraph are derogated from;

    • c. the duration of the experiment; and

    • d. by which manner and on the basis of which criteria the effects envisaged with the experiment are to be evaluated.

    The nomination for that general measure of management shall not be done earlier than four weeks after the draft has been submitted to both Chambers of the States General.

  • 3 In the case of ministerial arrangements, rules may be laid down on the implementation of an experiment.

  • 4 An experiment lasts for a maximum of six years, unless a longer duration is necessary given the special nature of the experiment. The duration of the experiment shall be determined for a maximum period of eight years. If, before an experiment has ended, a proposal of law has been submitted to the States General to convert the experiment into a structural legal arrangement, Our Minister may extend the experiment until the time when the experiment Bill to law is elevated and comes into effect.

  • 5 Our Minister shall send to the States-General a report on the effectiveness and effects of the experiment in practice three months before the end of the term of operation of a general measure of management referred to in paragraph 1. as well as a position on the continuation of that general measure of governance, other than a continuation as an experiment.

  • 6 This Article shall apply mutatis mutandis to a grouping between a higher education institution and a school referred to in the Secondary Education Act or an institution as referred to in Article 1.1.1 (b); or Article 1.4.1 of the Education and Vocational Education Act. In the case of a partnership with an institution referred to in Article 1.1.1 (b) of the Education and Vocational Education Act, this institution may derogate from Article 8.1.1 of that Law, if Chapter 7, Title 3, paragraph 1, of this Act shall be declared applicable.


Title 2.

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. Institutions for higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.8. List of funding for higher education funding

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 3 An amendment to the statutory name of a foundation or association, mentioned in the Annex , shall be effective from the date on which the amendment was notified in writing to our Minister.


Article 1.9. Financing and granting

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the purpose of taking care of initial education and, in so far as it concerns universities, for the purpose of carrying out scientific research, the Annex Institutions incorporated under a, c, h and j institutions, or legal persons with full jurisdiction, the other institutions listed in the Annex to this Act, which are entitled to finance from the funds of the cashier of the European Union, where Accreditation has been given to the training courses attached to those institutions or to a positive follow-up of training to the new training test or the new Ad Programme test. For the purposes of this paragraph, design and development activities and studies shall be directed at the vocational practice of higher education institutions as regards education.

  • 2 In the case of the examinations of initial training carried out with good results and on the basis of the ad programmes carried out within them, provided by the intermediary of the institutions, a degree is connected. Those to whom such degree has been granted are among those who have fulfilled the requirements, set in Article 7.18 , are entitled, in the cases eligible for this, to the degrees, mentioned in the Articles 7.10a , 7.10b and 7.18 , to be expressed in its own name.

  • 3 Condition for the provisions of the first and second paragraphs shall be that the institution concerned shall respect the conditions laid down in or pursuant to this Act with respect to:

    • a. Quality of care,

    • b. the planning and funding,

    • c. Staff,

    • d. the teaching offer, registration, education, exams and promotions,

    • e. the pre-training, selection or admission requirements;

    • f. the students and extraneï,

    • g. the legal protection of students and extraneï; and

    • (h) the Steering Board and the establishment.


Article 1.10. Nature of provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The provisions of this law governing the public higher education system apply to the cost of special higher education as any financing conditions, unless otherwise provided.


Paragraph 2. Legal persons with accredited initial education.

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.11. Designated institutions of higher education [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.12. Grating

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The results of the examinations of initial training carried out and implemented by legal persons for higher education carried out by the examinations of initial training carried out by legal persons for higher education shall be as set out in Article 7.10a Other Article 7.10b connected.

  • 2 The provisions of paragraph 1 shall be subject to compliance with the legal person concerned, as provided for in paragraph 3, and in accordance with or pursuant to the provisions of this Act in respect of:

    • a. Quality of care,

    • b. registration, teaching and examinations,

    • c. The pre-training requirements.

  • 3 The management of the legal person shall provide our Minister with the necessary information on the legal person. The management of the legal person shall provide an annual report to our Minister on the work of the legal person and shall include the results of quality assessment as referred to in Article 3 (2). Article 1.18 , as well as other information on the quality of the work of the legal person.

  • 4 Under the necessary information referred to in the first sentence of paragraph 3, information on changes in ownership, financial soundness or the administrative structure of the legal person, as well as all amendments, shall be understood in each case. of the data relating to the legal person to the Chamber of Commerce.


Paragraph 2a. Institutions or legal persons with accredited post-initial education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.12a. Degree of post-initial Masters Courses

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Examinations of post-initial masters ' training carried out with good results, provided by legal persons for higher education, shall be the master of the master's degree of education, Article 7.10a connected. Article 1.12, second, third and fourth paragraphs , is applicable.


Paragraph 3. Academic Hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.13. Academic hospitals; legal personality

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For each Article 1.8 The university which provides training for the profession of doctor is an academic hospital. The academic hospitals are included in part j of the Annex of this law.


Article 1.14. Funding for academic hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The academic hospitals are entitled to a part of the scientific medical education and research for the purpose of carrying out their work in scientific medicine and research. 'national' contribution on the basis of Article 2.5 has been established for the university to which the academic hospital is connected.

  • 2 The condition for the provisions of the first paragraph shall be that the institution concerned shall respect, in the case of, or under this law, the academic hospitals in respect of:

    • a. the planning and funding,

    • b. Staff, and

    • c. the Steering Board and the establishment.


Article 1.15. Nature of provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 4. Scientific research institutes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.16. Legal personality KNAW and KB

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences and the Royal Library possess legal personality.


Article 1.16a. Framework Law on self-employed administrative bodies

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Framework Law on self-employed administrative bodies applies to the Royal Library, with the exception of Article 15 of that Act .


Article 1.17. Funding

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences is entitled to a contribution from the State's coffers for the purpose of carrying out its activities under this Law. The first sentence shall apply to the Royal Library mutatis mutandis, without prejudice to its claim to a contribution on the basis of: Article 9 of the Public Library System Act .

  • 2 The provisions of paragraph 1 shall, in respect of the provisions of paragraph 1, be taken by the institution concerned in accordance with or in accordance with the provisions of this law with regard to:

    • a. Quality of care,

    • b. the planning and funding,

    • c. Staff, and

    • d. the Board and the establishment.

  • 3 The conditions referred to in the second paragraph A , and under B as for planning, do not concern the advisory function of the Royal Dutch Academy of Arts and Sciences.


Title 3. Quality care

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.18. Quality care

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board of an in Article 1.2, points a, b and d The institution shall ensure that, as far as possible in cooperation with other institutions, regular assessment, including by independent experts, of the quality of the work of the institution. Assessment of higher education institutions shall be carried out on the basis of students ' judgement of the quality of teaching of the institution. Where such assessment is made by independent experts, the results shall be available to the public. If the setting board of a higher education institution uses the option, intended to be used in the Article 5a.13a , the assessment will take place at least on the basis of the part of the accreditation framework for the institution quality assurance and quality aspects, intended to be used in the Article 5a.13b, second paragraph .

  • 2 Our Secretary of State shall monitor the implementation of the first paragraph with the exception of the last sentence. He may examine the quality of the work of the institutions in so far as it concerns the institutions referred to in the Article 1.2 (d) .

  • 3 The setting board of an in Article 1.2 (a) and (b) The institution shall also ensure that regular assessments of the quality of training are provided for in a regular assessment by independent experts in cooperation with other institutions within a fishing entity group. the Ad programs. The second sentence of the first paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis, and the results of the assessment shall be public. The assessment shall contain a summary judgment. The assessment shall be carried out at least on the basis of the part of the accreditation framework for accreditation under Article 5a.8 or Article 5a.13f and the aspects of quality referred to in 5a.8, second paragraph, or 5a.13f, first member.


Title 4. Other requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 1.19. Foreign Branch [ Treein effect at a time to be determined]

Compare Versions Save

This part has not (yet) entered into force; see the summary of changes


Article 1.20. Obligation to consult and report on the sex crimes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If the institution of the institution has become known in any way that a person entrusted with the tasks of his institution may be guilty or has committed a crime against the morals as referred to in Article 1 (2). Title XIV of the Code of Criminal Law in respect of an underage student of the institution, the competent authority shall, without delay, in consultation with the trust inspector provided for in Article 6 of the Law on Education Supervision .

  • 2 If the consultations referred to in paragraph 1 have to be concluded, it must be concluded that there is reasonable suspicion that the person concerned has been guilty of a crime as referred to in the first paragraph against a minor. student of the institution, the setting board shall promptly report to a police investigating officer as intended. Article 127 in conjunction with Article 141 of the Code of Criminal Procedure , and shall without delay inform the inspector of the trust of the inspector. Before the institution board is to make a declaration, it shall inform the parents of the student concerned, who shall be responsible for the task of the institution with the task of carrying out tasks.

  • 3 If a staff member has become known that a person responsible for the task of the institution may be guilty or has committed a crime as referred to in the first member of the institution to a minor student of the institution, the staff member shall inform the institution of the institution thereof without delay.


Article 1.21. Malting code of domestic violence and child abuse

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board shall establish a reporting code for the staff specifying incrementally and reasonably contributing to the rapid and adequate support of signs of domestic violence or child abuse. It may be provided.

  • 4 The institution of the institution shall promote knowledge and use of the milk code.

  • 5 In the case of, or under general management, the elements of a milk code shall be determined in each case.

Chapter 2. Planning and funding

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 This chapter, except for Article 2.13 and Title 5 , refers to the funded universities and colleges, the Open University, the philosophical universities, the Royal Dutch Academy of Sciences and the Royal Library.


Title 1. Schedule

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.2. Set Plan

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution management system shall establish once every six years a plan relating to the institution. The plan provides a description of the content and specification of the proposed policy of the institution for the duration of the plan. The plan pays attention to the plans to promote the quality of education and to improve the establishment of training courses in the institution. The setting board shall make the plan public.


Article 2.2a. Procedure and content set up of research institutions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board of the Royal Dutch Academy of Sciences and the setting board of the Royal Library couples by derogation from Article 2.2 a set plan not later than four years after the date of adoption of the previous plan, and shall immediately send it to our Minister after adoption.

  • 2 The setup plan takes into account the science budget referred to in Article 16a of the Dutch Organization for Scientific Research Act, the institution plans of universities, explorations, reports, opinions and other issues. recommendations to the extent that they are relevant to the performance of the institution's tasks, in the opinion of the institution.

  • 3 The setting plan shall in each case include:

    • a. the objectives of the Medium-Term Scientific Research Institution;

    • b. the main features of the policy to be implemented and the priorities to be implemented; and

    • c. the financial, human, material and organisational conditions that must be fulfilled.

  • 4 Our Minister shall inform his position on the institution plan within six months of receipt of the plan. Our Minister shall send copies thereof and of the institution plan to the Chambers of the States-General.

  • 5 Our Secretary of State may amend his position on the institution plan for the duration of the plan if the establishment of a new scientific budget gives rise to this. The fourth paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 2.3. Higher education and research plan

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister of Education, Culture and Science, for education and research in the field of agriculture and natural environment in accordance with our Minister of Economic Affairs, states, on the basis of the data set out in the annual reports on the policies envisaged for the work of the institutions with a higher education and research plan. The plan shall cover a period of at least four years.

  • 2 The higher education and research plan contains the intentions of the policy to be implemented by our minister in relation to higher education and scientific research.

  • 3 The higher education and research plan also includes in any case:

    • a summary of circumstances and data relevant to the policy to be carried out in relation to higher education and scientific research, and of the desired developments, including changes in respect of the social needs for higher education and scientific research,

    • b. general intentions contained in the policy rules, Article 6.2, fourth paragraph , shall be included, and

    • (c) a financial statement relating to the financing of the activities of the institutions which are eligible for this purpose.


Article 2.4. Establishment of higher education and research plans

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The higher education and research plan shall be established no later than four years after the date of adoption of the previous higher education and research plan. After consultation with the two Chambers of the States-General, the higher education and research plan may be determined not later than six months after the date specified in the first sentence.

  • 2 Our Minister of Education, Culture and Science shall present a draft of that plan to the Chambers of the States-General no later than six months prior to the date on which the higher education and research plan is to be determined by the latest.

  • 3 About the way the established plan is made public, Our Minister ' s Communication in the Official Gazette .


Title 2. Funding

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.5. National contribution to higher education institutions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The national contribution to which the Article 1.9, first paragraph The said claim shall be calculated on the basis of a general calculation method. By way of derogation from the first sentence, the national contribution may be calculated on the basis of a special method of calculation, in so far as it derives from Articles 5 and 7 of the Treaty between the Kingdom of the Netherlands and the Flemish Community. of Belgium on the transnational University of Limburg (Trb. 2001, 38).

  • 2 Our Minister may attach to the financing of research at universities conditions, related to the quality of the care.

  • 3 The state contribution is determined annually by Our Minister in accordance with the relevant part of the state budget established for that financial year.

  • 4 If the part of the budget referred to in paragraph 3 of the budget for the financial year in question is changed, the contribution shall be determined by our Minister.

  • 5 The driver's contribution is paid according to a cash rhythm to be determined by our minister.

  • 6 As long as the state contribution has not been fixed or further established, an advance payment shall be made by our Minister. The fifth paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 2.6. Calculation of the national contribution

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The in Article 2.5, first paragraph , the general calculation method shall be determined by or on the basis of a general measure of management. The general calculation method for all the institutions or groups of institutions shall contain equally applicable standards. These measures shall relate to the nature and extent of the work and to its implementation.

  • 2 The special method of calculation provided for in Article 2.5, first paragraph , shall be determined by or pursuant to general measures of management. That general measure of management shall also lay down the education applicable to the provision of education. The special calculation method shall contain measures which in each case refer to the study results.

  • 3 As regards the higher education institutions, with the exception of the Open University, the measures in each case refer to the number of students and to the study results. The criteria may vary by training or group of training courses or by an ad programme.

  • 4 The criteria for the financing of scientific research at universities refer, in any case, to the social and scientific needs of the research, taking into account the profile of the research and technological development of the scientific community. institutions and the quality of the research.

  • 5 With a view to promoting the quality of higher education or scientific research, our Minister may, by way of derogation from the general calculation referred to in the first paragraph, contribute to the contribution of the national Article 1.9, first paragraph , shall add an amount in relation to the quality of higher education or scientific research set up by an institution, or of a quality of the quality of the higher education.

  • 6 In calculating the amount to be added to the national contribution under the fifth paragraph, the criteria for the differentiation of education, educational intensity, teacher quality, to be determined by a general measure of management and study ucces. Other measures to be used in the calculation may be adopted by means of a general measure of management. A general measure of management shall also determine the period for which the calculation method referred to in the fifth paragraph applies.

  • 7 Our Minister shall present the draft general measure of directors as referred to in the first, second and sixth members, to both Chambers of the States-General. The nomination for that general measure of management shall not be taken after the expiry of four weeks after the submission of such a measure.

  • 8 A draft general measure of management as referred to in paragraph 6 shall not be submitted to both Chambers of the States-General than after that draft consultation has taken place with a representation of the institutions of the institutions of the Member States of the European Union. the funded universities, colleges, and Open University and with the eligible interest organizations of students.


Article 2.6a. National contribution to scientific research institutes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The revenues of the Royal Dutch Academy of Sciences and of the Royal Library consist of:

    • a. The contribution from the State's treasury,

    • b. Income, which is related to provisions for which the national contribution has been granted; and

    • c. Other income.

  • 2 The national contribution shall be determined or determined by the adoption or further adoption of the law of the chapter of the state budget on which it is proposed.

  • 3 The national contribution shall be paid in such instalments and in such amounts as may be necessary for the making of payments by the institution.

  • 4 As long as the state contribution has not been fixed or further determined, an advance payment shall be made in accordance with rules to be made by Our Minister.

  • 5 When determining the contribution, no revenue as referred to in point (c) of the first paragraph shall be taken into account.

  • 6 Our Minister proposes rules regarding the use of balances arising from the income referred to in paragraph 1 (a) and (b).


Article 2.7. Forecast and publication of the public contribution

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our minister makes to every institution, intended in Article 1.9, first paragraph Each year, no later than in October, the maximum possible cost for the forthcoming financial year is known for the time being. It shall inform the Commission of the manner in which the calculation of the estimated national contribution has been calculated.

  • 2 Our minister makes every setting as soon as possible after the Article 2.5, third paragraph , known assays, the national contribution to which the institution is responsible.

  • 3 The second paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to the Article 2.5, fourth paragraph The detailed definition of the contribution to the state of the state.


Article 2.7a. Rijkscontribution and private activities

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Rules governing the use of the public contribution to private activities for the purposes of education or research may be laid down or under general management.


Article 2.8. Budget

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution shall adopt a budget for the institution each year, prior to the financial year in question. The financial year shall coincide with the calendar year. The board of an in Article 1.13, first paragraph The university, when adopting the budget, takes into account, for the benefit of the academic hospital, the agreed contribution to the public at the time when the budget is adopted. The boards of the institutions, mentioned in Article 1.5 The budget, together with amendments to the budget, shall be notified to our Minister within 14 days of its adoption.

  • 2 The budget shall provide an estimate of income and expenditure and of the income and expenses of the institution and shall be in balance. In the budget of the Royal Dutch Academy of Sciences and those of the Royal Library an allocation of resources is included which is in line with the setup plan, intended Article 2.2a . The revenue generated by the budget from the national budget shall be based on the national contribution, as estimated by our Minister, as estimated for the financial year in question and, where appropriate, determined by the national budget.

  • 3 The institution's management shall be responsible for amending the budget if the established national contribution differs from the estimated cost of the money entered in the budget, and in the case of a specified state contribution.

  • 4 The institution's management shall make the necessary expenditure within the limits of the budget adopted or amended.

  • 5-and transfer to the budget outposts may be effected by the institution in the cases provided for in the rules to be laid down by such board.


Article 2.9. Reporting

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board shall submit a report to our Minister on an annual basis by 1 July. The report shall consist of the annual accounts with the corresponding budget, the administrative report and other financial data, together with a justification on the manner in which a branch code has been derogated from for good governance, in so far as such a code has been used. in accordance with Article 2.14 is designated. The report shall indicate the extent to which the work on which the contribution has been granted and an efficient use of the national contribution, including in the light of the institution plan, is due to be duly carried out. In any event, the use of non-efficient use of the contribution shall be subject to the extent to which amounts are used to execute the procedure for the recognition of acquired competences or to compensate for any way in which students or students are compensated in any way. extraneï for tuition fees, exam fees, course fees or whatever colleges are concerned with the financial support provided in Article 7.50, third paragraph , other than by virtue of the second sentence of that paragraph or of the Articles 7.51 to 7.51k .

  • 2 Account shall be taken of the financial management of the institution for the preceding financial year and accounts for the financial statements. The management report shall include the proposed policy on the work of the institution, including in the light of the results of quality assessment as referred to in Article 4 (2). Article 1.18 and other information on the quality of the institution's work. The administrative report of a university to which an academic hospital is connected shall be Article 12.21 A summary of the intentions concerning the coordination of the work of the university and the university's academic hospital in the field of the European Union, including, where it is a special university, a summary of the intentions to be taken into account. medical education and research. Application of the preceding sentence shall be omitted if the document has already been added to an earlier management report and since then it has not been amended or has been re-established.

  • 3 If expenditure is in contraa with the provisions of, or by virtue of, the law, or if activities for which the contribution has been granted have not been properly implemented or the State contribution has been improperly used, our Minister, to determine that the amounts involved are deducted from the national contribution.

  • 4 The result of the year under review shall be set off against the general reserve of the institution.

  • 5 The members of the executive board or of the general administration of a legal personality incumbent on public authority shall be personally liable to the institution for damage resulting from expenditure incurred in breach of the administrative system. certain by or under the law, to the extent that our Minister has determined that the amounts involved in such expenditure are to be deducted from the national aid, unless it is established that they have not cooperated in the making of that expenditure. If, within a period to be determined by our Minister, no action has been taken by the institution in this regard, our Minister may proceed to that effect on behalf of and for the benefit of the institution.

  • 6 By way of derogation from the first paragraph, the general management of the Royal Library shall submit the report to Our Minister annually before 15 March each year.


Article 2.9a. Settlement of claims

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister is empowered to forgo claims under this Act from or to the authority of an institution with claims of or upon our Minister under any other law.


Article 2.10. Obligation to provide information and control of the ministerial auditor

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The auditor appointed by Our Minister for the examination of the ministerial annual accounts has access to each institution for the purpose of carrying out that investigation. The auditor may also be entrusted by Our Minister with an examination of the effectiveness of the management of the institution. The auditor shall be provided with all information which he considers necessary for the performance of his task.


Article 2.10a. Audit Protocol

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In the case of, or pursuant to general management measures, rules shall be laid down concerning the auditing of the accounts, the use of the contribution and the costs of the expenditure declared by the institutions.


Article 2.11. Special provision university teacher training courses [ Expersal by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.12. Special provision of academic hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The board of an in Article 1.13, first paragraph , when the university pays, as soon as the Article 2.5 payment of the contribution, or payment of an advance, to that payment shall be received, without delay, at the academic hospital connected with that university, the part of the State's contribution to which the academic hospital is based on the basis of Article 1.14, first paragraph That's right.


Article 2.13. Outdoor use building and land use

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution which intends to permanently no longer use any building or land in which a national contribution has been granted is intended to be used by the institution without delay notifying our Minister.

  • 2 Our Minister may decide within 90 days of receipt of the notice, referred to in paragraph 1, that the buildings or land be transferred to the State or for the benefit of education or research on another by which he is to be identify legal person. The transfer shall be effected by the registration of the relevant decision of Our Minister in the Public Registers, as set out in Section 2 of Title 1 of Book 3 of the Civil Code .

  • 3 The setting board cannot lease, dispose or subject to any limited right the buildings or areas unless our Minister, in agreement with our Minister of Finance, does not share his or her powers in the second paragraph. use.

  • 4 In the case of transfer of ownership of buildings or land under paragraph 2, the State shall, in so far as these buildings or areas have been paid by the legal person from its own resources and not make a national contribution, make a contribution to the transfer of property Our minister's amount to be determined. Our Minister shall fix this amount in proportion to the value in the economic traffic of such buildings or land.


Title 3. Establishment report and indication of branchode

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.14. Establishment report and indication of branchode

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A ministerial arrangement may lay down rules for the establishment of the report and, in the case of a general measure of management, one or more of the branch codes may be designated for good governance.


Title 4. Special provisions relating to financial management

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.15. Colleges And Colleges [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.16. Removal of institutions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 When a public institution is abolished and when the financing of a special institution is terminated, the institution's administration shall, as soon as possible after the termination or termination of the expenditure, ensure the establishment of a a final statement. The final statement shall be sent to Our Minister and shall be accompanied by a declaration of a chartered accountant as referred to in Article 393, 1st paragraph, of Book 2 of the Civil Code .

  • 2 Unless a different arrangement is made with Our Minister, the institution of the institution shall be liable to the State for an amount, if the final statement of funds contains a surplus. The amount shall be fixed by Our Minister and shall not exceed the balance of the final statement. The amount shall be fixed taking into account the funds spent on investment by the institution of the institution.

  • 3 In the case of termination or termination of funding as referred to in paragraph 1, the institution shall, as soon as possible, announce to our Minister what measures it has taken to ensure that the institution Enrolled students to complete the course of training at another institution.


Article 2.17. Management of resources

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution's management shall manage the resources of the institution in such a way as to ensure a proper operation and the survival of the institution.

  • 2 Under ministerial arrangements, rules may be laid down on the setting-off of funds, the setting up of money loans and the commitment of financial products.


Title 5. Grants to academic hospitals for the purpose of educational provision

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.18. Educational provision grant

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The level of the grant to the academic hospital or to the management of the legal person which maintains the educational provision is determined according to the number of pupils which are the average of the highest daily censuses in the months of September to April of the school year 1994-95 of pupils from schools as intended Article 2 (g) of the Law on the centres of expertise As that article was stated on 31 July 1999, which were included in the relevant academic hospital, and an amount per pupil.

  • 3 The administration of the academic hospital or the legal person who maintains an educational provision shall receive the grant referred to in paragraph 2, subject to the condition that staff training places related to this grant is appointed, which was appointed on 31 July 1999 at one or more of the schools referred to in Article 2 (g) of the Law on the centres of expertise Such as that article was 31 July 1999, unless the management of the academic hospital or the legal person who maintains the educational provision demonstrates that no member of that staff is available in respect of a place of formal establishment. was that the site was accepted. This appointment obligation shall apply to the catch in question to those schools for the staff concerned.


Article 2.19. Budget and reporting

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

With regard to the educational provision specified in: Article 1.4, second paragraph , the management of an academic hospital or the management of the legal person who maintains the educational provision shall adopt a budget for the following year by 1 July each year and an annual report for the previous year and shall transmit to the Commission the following year: who are to our minister. Our Minister may lay down a directive on the establishment of the budget and the annual report.


Article 2.20. Control and recovery

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Within 10 months of the end of the calendar year on which the grant was granted, the management of the academic hospital or the management of the legal person who maintains the educational provision shall make a statement by an auditor as intended in Article 393, 1st paragraph, of Book 2 of the Civil Code To our Minister, which shows the extent to which the grant awarded has been spent in accordance with the provisions of this Law.

  • 2 To the extent that the declaration provided for in paragraph 1 does not appear that the grant has been used in accordance with the provisions of this Law, our Minister shall recover the amount in question.

Chapter 3. Consultations

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 3.1. General consultations

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister regularly consults with a representation of the institution boards of the funded universities and colleges, the Open University, the Royal Dutch Academy of Sciences and the Royal Library of Science and Technology. general policy matters in respect of those institutions.

  • 2 Our Minister regularly consults with a representation of the institution boards of the funded universities to which an academic hospital is affiliated and of the academic hospitals on issues of general policy on the academic hospitals or on the academic hospitals and universities.


Article 3.2. Consultation with individual institutions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister takes decisions as intended in the Article 2.9, fourth paragraph , 2.13, second and fourth members , and 7.56, first paragraph, point (b) , not after having given the institution's authority concerned the opportunity to consult with him on his/her intention to take such action.


Article 3.3. Consultation with student organisations

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister regularly consults with the appropriate interest organizations of students on matters of general interest to students.

  • 2 Our Secretary of State shall arrange for the financial support of the representatives of the interest groups referred to in paragraph 1, in relation to the work to be carried out by them.

Chapter 4. The staff

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 4.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 This chapter covers universities, colleges, the Open Universities and the philosophical universities of the world.


Article 4.2. Personnel policy

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall determine the personnel policy and shall implement the staff management. It shall respect the rules laid down in or pursuant to the law and the requirements of due diligence.

  • 2 The institution board of a university, a college or the Open University shall, for the benefit of the managerial functions in the field of education, draw up research from each institution-based institution, if There is an under-representation of women in managerial posts in the field of education and research, once every 4 years a document on the proportional representation of women in managerial posts Solid.

  • 3 The document contains target figures, including a given period of time within which these targets are realised, which by means of the institution's management is a policy of proportional representation of women in managerial positions. functions, so that women and men will work proportionally in these functions. The proportional representation shall be based on the relationship between men and women as regards teaching and research staff working in the education and research carried out by the institution, as is apparent from the point of view of the from the figures published annually by Our Minister. The document shall also indicate the measures taken by the institution and will take in order to achieve the objectives referred to in the first sentence and gives an overview of the objectives pursued and achieved by the policy on the implementation of the relevant guidelines. proportional representation of women in managerial positions during the period covered by the document, the period for which the previous document was valid.

  • 4 The institution shall ensure that a copy of the document is made available in the building of the institution to a place accessible to the staff and to the students, and that a copy shall be kept at the premises of the institution. administration of the institution.


Article 4.3. Organized consultations [ Expconducted by 03-08-2005]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 4.4 [ Expired by 01-01-1995]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 4.5. Rules of legal position

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Taking into account the rules referred to in paragraphs 2 and 3, the institution of a public institution shall regulate the status of the staff in accordance with or pursuant to general rules of management, and shall assume the institution's governing body. a special institution to regulate the status of the staff.

  • 2 In the case of a general measure of administrative administration or by a general measure of management, rules may be laid down concerning:

    • a. salary scales and starting points for which a system of performance to be established by the institution of the institution must comply, or for the same

    • (b) the rights and obligations of staff and the institution of the institution in the event of sickness, childbirth, pregnancy, incapacity for work and dismissal, in so far as they exceed those prescribed by law, or the conditions under which they are subject to such obligations. institution management shall regulate these rights and obligations themselves or care for their arrangements.

  • 3 In the case of a general measure of management, rules may be laid down for general working time.

  • 4 The rules governing the legal position referred to in paragraph 1 shall also include the adoption of provisions on appointment, suspension, disciplinary measures and dismissal of staff. The provisions relating to dismissal may not confer less rights on the staff of the public institutions than those resulting from the provisions of mandatory law of a contract of employment for employees of an employment contract. Title 10 of Book 7 of the Civil Code .

  • 5 On the arrangements referred to in paragraphs 1 and 4, and on other matters of general interest for the particular legal status of the staff of the institution concerned, consultations shall be held by or on behalf of the institution of the institution conducted with the appropriate professional organisations of public and education staff, in accordance with the manner agreed in writing. In the event of a dispute concerning participation in consultations referred to in the previous sentence, and in the event of a dispute concerning the nature, content and organisation of the consultations, the parties concerned shall submit the dispute to a dispute settlement committee. This dispute resolution committee shall be composed of three persons appointed jointly by the Parties. The ruling of the Dispute Settlement Committee has binding force.


Article 4.6 [ Expired by 01-01-1995]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 4.7. Committees of profession staff special institutions [ Expestablished by 01-07-2015]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 5. Monitoring [ Expoperation by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5.1. Supervision order, inspection [ Expconducted by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5.2. Inspection by inspection [ Expconducted by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5.3. Committees of independent experts [ Expestablished by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5.4. Access and intelligence inspection and members commissions [ Expandes by 11-05-2001]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5.5. Exercise supervision in consultation with other Ministers [ Expired by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 5a. Accreditation in higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 This chapter covers the funding of universities and colleges and the Open University and at the philosophical universities of the world.

  • This Chapter shall also cover the legal entities with full jurisdiction who provide or wish to provide for accredited initial or post-initial training.


Title 1. Accreditation body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.2. Institution and tasks accrediting body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 There is an accreditation body in charge of activities in the framework of accreditation, the new training key, the new Ad Programme key and the setting test quality care based on the application of the accreditation. Title 2 or 2a of this chapter and other tasks assigned to him by or under the law. The accreditation body shall have legal personality.

  • 2 The accreditation body is also responsible for the establishment of a committee of experts, which advises on the application for the new training test, the new Ad Programme key or the setting-up quality management. In addition, the accreditation body agrees with an expert committee of experts, jointly compiled by the institution boards within a visitation group, for the assessment. Article 1.18, third paragraph , for the purpose of the application for accreditation, if the accreditation body is satisfied that the expert committee is independent and competent. If the setting board fails to establish a committee of experts in cooperation with other institutions within a visitation group, the accreditation body shall make a binding proposal for the composition of the committee. A student shall be a member of the committees of experts referred to in the preceding sentences.

  • 2a The accreditation body shall also be responsible for the review of the accreditation and the new training tests:

    • a. The addition of an institution proposed by an institution to a degree as specified in Article 7.10a, second and third paragraphs , to international recognisability using a reference list established under ministerial arrangements;

    • (b) whether the training name used by the institution of the institution provides sufficient insight into the content of the training course and is consistent with what is common within the fishing permit group or sector to which the training belongs.

  • 3a The accreditation body shall, after the relevant institution boards have the opportunity to present their views, shall communicate to the training courses provided by the institutions in the course of a fishing period.

  • 4 The accreditation body shall report to our Minister, on request, on the quality of training in higher education in order to ensure comparability on the basis of his assessments under this Chapter. The accreditation body shall, on that basis, present proposals which it considers necessary in the interests of the quality of training in higher education.

  • 5 The accreditation body shall also be responsible for the accreditation framework provided for in Article 5a.2a , to discuss with bodies in the European countries, in particular with bodies in the border countries.

  • 6 The other work carried out by the accreditation body for the assessment of teaching other than higher education or for the purpose of contracts referred to in Article 1, second paragraph of the EEC Treaty, shall be governed by ministerial arrangement. Accreditation Convention.


Article 5a.2a. Accreditation framework

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The accreditation body shall lay down its method of accreditation, the new training test, the new ad programme key and the quality assurance set, the composition of a vision group and the definition of the criteria, as set out in Annex II. Article 5a.8, second paragraph , 5a.10a, second member , 5a.13b, second member , 5a.13f, 1st Member and 5a.13g, 1st Member , fixed in the accreditation framework, which makes at least distinction between scientific education and higher vocational education, between bachelor and graduate training courses, and where the difference is made in the manner of assessment of applications based on Title 2a with respect to Title 2 shall be included.

  • 2 Before adopting or amending the accreditation framework, the accreditation body shall consult with representatives of the institutions and other persons concerned, including student organisations, as referred to in Article 2 (2). Article 3.3 and the appropriate professional organisations of public and education personnel.

  • 3 The framework for accreditation or a change thereof shall be subject to the approval of our Minister. The approval may be withheld because of conflict with law or general interest. Our Secretary of State shall give his approval not after four weeks have elapsed since his intention to do so was submitted to the two Chambers of the States. The decision on approval shall be made available to the accreditation body for approval within 17 weeks of the date of dispatch of the decision.

  • 4 The accreditation framework or its amendment shall be published by the State Official Gazette.


Article 5a.3. Nomination board member of the board of accreditation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Before our Minister makes a nomination for board members as referred to in Article 5 of the Accredited Convention, the joint institutions referred to in Article 1.2 (a) and (b) and the relevant trade union organizations shall be covered by the Public and education staff have been heard.

  • 2 The first paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to the hearing of the joint student organisations referred to in Article 3.3, in connection with the nomination of two board members.

  • 3 The board members nominated by Our Minister are not to our Minister subordinate officials.

  • 4 Before the Committee of Ministers referred to in the Accredited Convention suspends or dismisses a board member nominated by our Minister, the institutions and trade unions, referred to in paragraph 1, shall be heard by Our Minister.


Article 5a.3a. Accreditation Body Meetings [ Expired by 01-01-2011]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.4. Remuneration or indemnification [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.5. Staff [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.6. Budget [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.6a. Budget Establishment [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.6b. Financial resources

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister shall make available annually to the accreditation body charged to the budget of the Ministry of Education, Culture and Science, in accordance with Articles 14 and 15, third paragraph, of the Accredit-treaty for the performance of its tasks, arising from Article 1, first and second paragraphs, of the Accredit-treaty.

  • 2. Our Minister shall fix annually before 1 September of any calendar year, but not after consultation with the accreditation body, the amount to be made available to the accreditation body for the following calendar year. shall be drawn up and shall include this amount in the proposal of the Law establishing the Budget of the Ministry of Education, Culture and Science.

  • 3 The accounting year of the accreditation body shall be covered by the calendar year.

  • 4 As long as the law establishing the budget referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 has not entered into force, our Minister shall, as from the calendar year to which the budget relates, provide for monthly instalments. advance to the accreditation body up to a maximum of the amount referred to in the second paragraph.


Article 5a.6c. Prior Consent [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.6d. Equalisation reserve [ Expelling per 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.7. Annual Report [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.7a. Annual Accounts [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.7b. Establishment Accounts [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 2. Accreditation and key new training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.8. Comprehensive assessment criteria for the provision of accreditation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the accreditation framework provided for in Article 5a.2a , for the granting of accreditation under this Article, the accreditation body shall lay down:

    • a. Data that the institution board shall send to an application for accreditation,

    • b. the manner in which the independence of the assessment is ensured;

    • c. the procedure for agreeing to a committee of experts, referred to in Article 5a.2, second paragraph , and

    • d. the conditions for the granting of the judgments are insufficient, sufficient, good and excellent to the components referred to in paragraph 2.

  • 2 In assessing the application for accreditation, consideration shall be given to the quality aspects relating to training, at least to be assessed:

    • (a) the intended attainment of the final level of training, having regard to what is internationally desirable and common;

    • b. the content and structure of the educational programme;

    • c. the realised final level, having regard to what is internationally desirable and common;

    • d. the soundness of the students ' assessment, review and examination;

    • (e) the quality and quantity of the personnel and personnel policies which have an impact on the quality of training;

    • f. the training-specific provisions as well as the institution-wide facilities which influence the quality of the training including adequate guidance and facilities providing for access and study for the training of workers. promoting students with disabilities; and

    • g. the design and organisation of the internal quality management system aimed at the systematic improvement of training.

  • 3 The assessment of the application for accreditation shall jointly and during the same period for all training courses belonging to a visitation group and for which the time limit of an granted accreditation expires within one year or for which a decision on new training is due to expire within one year.


Article 5a.8a. Assessment Bodies Disclosure [ Expired by 01-01-2011]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.9

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Accreditation shall be granted upon application of the institution board.

  • 2 An application for accreditation shall be submitted to the accreditation body for a date to be determined by the accreditation body. The date may vary per visitation group.

  • 4 The accreditation body shall take a decision on the application within three months of the application deadline. It shall enter into force from the day on which the decision was taken.

  • 6 If the accreditation body decides that accreditation is not granted because in the assessment, Article 1.18, third paragraph By way of derogation from the fourth paragraph, by way of derogation from the fourth paragraph, the fourth sentence of Article 1.18, third sentence, shall enter into force from the day of its publication and may within one year following that of its publication. publication, a new application for accreditation shall be submitted. By way of derogation from the seventh paragraph, the period of the accreditation shall be renewed and extended until such time as the application for accreditation has been decided on the application for accreditation under the conditions set out in the eighth paragraph.

  • 7 The decision to grant accreditation shall expire six years from the date of entry into force of the Decision.

  • 8 If, by derogation from the seventh paragraph, an institution board for the date referred to in paragraph 2 has submitted an application for accreditation, the period of its accreditation shall be extended to the time when the application for accreditation is shall decide if the accreditation body has not taken a decision before the end of the period referred to in the seventh paragraph. In that case, the period of the accreditation shall be extended until the end of the year of study or, if necessary, until the end of the subsequent year of study.

  • 9 The institution shall be the accreditation body responsible for the reimbursement of the costs of the application for accreditation and visitation in accordance with a rate to be fixed by our Minister after consultation with the accreditation body.

  • 10 By way of derogation from the seventh paragraph, our Minister may extend the term of accreditation for a maximum period of two years for the purpose of the simultaneous assessment of the Visitation Group.


Article 5a.10. Accreditation report

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The accreditation body shall adopt its opinion in an accreditation report consisting of the following elements:

    • (a) the decision on the application for accreditation,

    • b. the findings as a result of the assessment of the training referred to in Article 5a.9, third paragraph ,

    • c. a final section insufficient, sufficient, good or excellent for the training, and where appropriate

    • d. the special characteristics of the training.

  • 3 Before adopting the accreditation report, the accreditation body shall give the institution's authority the opportunity to present its views on the proposed accreditation report within a time limit to be determined by the accreditation body. Of course

  • 4 The accreditation body shall forward the accreditation report without delay to the institution management authority and, at the same time, make the report public.

  • 5 The accreditation body shall provide a copy of the accreditation report upon request. The accreditation body shall require reimbursement of the costs for the issue of a copy of the accreditation report in accordance with a rate to be fixed by our Minister after consultation with the accreditation body.


Article 5a.10a. Advanced assessment criteria for the new training test key

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the accreditation framework provided for in Article 5a.2a , for the provision of the new training test under this Article, the accreditation body shall lay down:

    • a. Data which the institution board shall send to an application for a new training test; and

    • b. to the extent that a new training test is subject to conditions as set out in Article 5a.11, fourth paragraph , has been granted, the procedure and conditions for the institution.

  • 2 In assessing the application for a new training test, consideration shall be given to the quality aspects relating to the proposed training, which shall at least assess:

    • (a) the intended attainment of the final level of training, having regard to what is internationally desirable and common;

    • b. the content and structure of the educational programme;

    • c. the manner of assessment, review and examination of the students,

    • d. the quality and quantity of the personnel and personnel policies which have an impact on the quality of training;

    • e. the training-specific provisions as well as the institution-wide facilities which influence the quality of training including adequate guidance and facilities providing for access and study promoting students with disabilities; and

    • f. the design and organisation of the internal quality management system aimed at the systematic improvement of training.

  • 3 If the new training test has been requested for an education which is already in actual education at the time of the application, it shall be assessed, instead of the aspects referred to in paragraph 2 (a) and (c), as follows:

    • a. the realised level, having regard to what is internationally desirable and common; and

    • b. the soundness of the students ' assessment, review and examination.

  • 4 If the retraining test has been requested for an education which at the time of the application is not yet in fact trained and the training is provided by an institution which does not have a set test The following aspects of quality shall be assessed in the following three years after the new training test has been granted: quality assurance or a quality assurance in terms of conditions shall be assessed three years after the new training test has been granted:

    • a. the realised level, having regard to what is internationally desirable and common; and

    • b. the soundness of the students ' assessment, review and examination.

  • 5 Without prejudice to the second paragraph, the accreditation body shall lay down its procedure for the new training test of the initial training provided by a legal person wishing to provide accredited training courses in accordance with the frameworks, in Article 5a.8, first paragraph .


Article 5a.11. New Training Key

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The new training test shall be granted upon application of the institution. A key of new training is not required in case of undoing a merge as intended. Article 6.2, fifth paragraph .

  • 2 The accreditation body shall take a decision within six months of the receipt of the application for the new training test. In this Decision, the accreditation body shall indicate which part of the Central Register of Higher Education Training, intended to be carried out in the Article 6.13 , in its opinion for the training, it is appropriate to which fishing group is included in the training.

  • 3 The accreditation body shall not grant any new training for a period of three years, if the information given in the application in question indicates that the institution intends to provide training which is fully or substantially similar to that of the institution. having an education, provided by that institution, for which no accreditation has been granted or the decision to grant accreditation has been withdrawn.

  • 4 The accreditation body may grant a test of new training under conditions. A general measure of management shall determine the cases in which the accreditation body may grant a test of new training under conditions and the conditions which may be laid down. If, within a period of not more than two years, the accreditation body fails to comply with the conditions laid down, the training shall be subject to a new training test as from the day on which the accreditation body decides to take such action. has logged. Article 5a.12, fifth paragraph , shall apply mutatis mutandis. Our Minister shall submit the draft general measure of directors as referred to in the second sentence to the Second Chamber of the States-General. The nomination for that general measure of management shall not be taken after the expiry of four weeks after the submission of such a measure.

  • 5 With a decision to grant a test of new training, the institution board which registers as a new course in the Management Central Register shall have training in higher education, intended to be carried out in accordance with Article 6.13 .

  • 6 The decision to grant an additional training test shall be deleted:

    • a. After six years,

    • (b) a year after the date on which the decision to grant a test has been completed, if the conditions set out in paragraph 4 are not fulfilled,

    • (c) after 10 months, if the institution board has not registered the funded training within this period in the Central Register of higher education training, intended to be carried out in accordance with the rules of the Article 6.13 , or

    • d. after six months, if the institution board has not registered an education, not training under c, within this period, in the Central Register of higher education training, intended to be carried out in accordance with Article 6.13 .

  • 7 The new training test shall also be deleted as the assessment referred to in Article 5a.10a, fourth paragraph , of one or both of the aspects referred to in subparagraphs (a) and (b), is not sufficient, unless the accreditation body decides to grant a recovery period as referred to in point (a) of this Article. Article 5a.12a . In that case, the recovery period shall not exceed one year. Article 5a.12a is for the remainder of the corresponding application.

  • 9 If a test of new training is requested for a master degree in higher vocational education which is the continuation of a postinitial master ' s degree in higher vocational education, for which accreditation has been granted, it shall grant Accreditation body the new training test without further examination for the same period as applied to accreditation.

  • 10 Our Minister may extend the deadline of the decision to further training for a maximum of two years in connection with the simultaneous assessment of the visitation group.


Article 5a.12. Impact Loss Accreditation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If the accreditation of an education after the expiry of the period, referred to in Article 5a.9, sixth and seventh member , or Article 5a.12a, first paragraph , the institution shall ensure that students who are enrolled in the course of training are given the opportunity to complete this training to another institution. For those students for whom it is not possible, the training course will continue to the institution. The setting board shall, within six weeks, publish the content of the decision that does not re-grant the accreditation. In so doing, the institution board shall also publish:

    • a. to which other institution students may complete that training,

    • (b) the period during which the training is continued for the benefit of the students referred to in the second sentence, provided that they continue to follow that training without interruption and that period shall not exceed those remaining for those students. the duration of the training or of the ad programme related to an ad programme plus one year shall be equal to one year.

  • 3 The expiry of the period specified in Article 5a.9, sixth and seventh member , in respect of a legal person for higher education, after the expiry of the period laid down by the legal person, named in paragraph 1, does not have a degree of qualification as intended to be used in the examinations of the Article 7.10a is connected and that registration in the Central Register courses higher education, intended in Article 6.13 , terminated.

  • 4 Our Minister may impose a penalty on the penalty of EUR 500 for each day that the institution's administration exceeds the six-week period referred to in the first paragraph, third sentence. A maximum of EUR 50 000 shall be applied.

  • 5 The first to fourth members shall apply mutatis mutandis in respect of training which, on the basis of Article 5a.11, fifth paragraph , as new training has been included in the Central Register training courses higher education and enclosing no accreditation has been granted.

  • 6 By way of derogation from the first to fifth paragraphs, and if the importance of maintaining an effective educational offer is progressing this, our minister may, after the expiry of the period, be Article 5a.9, sixth and seventh member (b) decide that an aid granted by the Minister for a period to be determined by Our Minister reserves the right to pay the costs as referred to in the Article 1.9, first paragraph , that to the exams a degree as intended in Article 7.10a continues to be connected and that registration in the Central Register training courses higher education, intended Article 6.13 , it will not be terminated.


Article 5a.12a. Recovery Period

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Where the accreditation body determines that the training does not meet the quality aspects, Article 5a.8, second paragraph , once the validity of the last accreditation decision or the decision demonstrating that the new training test has been successfully completed, may be extended for a maximum period of two years. For this purpose, the accreditation body shall decide if one of the cases to be determined by a general measure of management is concerned.

  • 2 The accreditation body shall include in the decision extending the period of validity of the improvement aspects of quality. It may also include conditions in this respect.

  • 4 By way of derogation from Article 5a.9, second paragraph , the institution board shall apply to the accreditation body for an application for a decision establishing that the training fulfils the accreditation framework, at least half a year before the end of the period of validity of the extension decision. of accreditation.

  • 5 The decision of the accreditation body referred to in paragraph 4 shall apply from the date of the adoption by the accreditation body of the determination referred to in the first paragraph. On the adoption decision is Article 5a.9, seventh and eighth paragraphs , mutatis mutandis.


Article 5a.12b. Revoke accreditation and test new training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister may, after receiving advice from the accreditation body, revoke a decision to grant accreditation or test new training if assessment of aspects of quality of training, intended to be used in Article 5a.8, second paragraph , 5a.10a, second member , 5a.13f, 1st Member , or 5a.13g, 1st Member , in such a way as to ensure that this assessment of those aspects would lead to a rejection of the application for accreditation or test new training.

  • 2 Before taking a decision as referred to in the first paragraph, our Minister shall hear the institution's administration.


Article 5a.13. New Ad Program Key

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The new Ad Programme key is issued upon request of the institution board. The institution's management shall specify the training within which the programme will be implemented. An application may not be submitted if and for so long as regards that training Article 5a.12a is subject to the application of the rules in force.

  • 2 The accreditation body shall take a decision within six months of receipt of the application. In this Decision, the accreditation body shall indicate which part of the Central Register of Higher Education Training, intended to be carried out in the Article 6.13 , in his opinion for the training, is appropriate.

  • 3 The decision to grant a test new ad programme shall lapse if the institution board has not registered the Ad programme within 10 months of the register referred to in paragraph 2 as the Ad programme within a funded training will be taken care of, and if the institution board has not registered the Ad programme within six months in that registry if the Ad programme is to be taken care of within a non-funded training course.

  • 4 The decision showing that the new ad programme has been carried out with a positive effect expires at the same time that the validity of the last accreditation decision or the new training decision expires in relation to the new training programme. bachelortraining of which the Ad programme is a part.


Title 2a. Quality assurance setup test

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.13a. Quality assurance setup test

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The administration of a higher education institution may apply for a quality assurance set-up.


Article 5a.13b. Quality Care Set Test Criteria Assessment Criteria

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the accreditation framework provided for in Article 5a.2a , for the provision of the institution's quality assurance, the accreditation body shall lay down:

    • a. Data that the institution board shall send to an application for the quality management of the institution; and

    • b. the manner in which the independence of the assessment is ensured.

  • 2 The assessment of the application for a quality assurance institution shall, in so far as they relate to the quality of its training, be assessed:

    • a. the vision of the quality of her education,

    • b. the design and effectiveness of the internal quality assurance of an institution;

    • c. the policy on staff and facilities;

    • d. Facilities that promote accessibility and stud ability for students with a function restriction.


Article 5a.13c. Quality Care Set-up Decision

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The decision to grant a quality assurance institution shall expire six years after the date of entry into force of the decision.

  • 2 An application for renewal of the decision to grant a quality assurance institution shall be submitted to the accreditation body for at least one year before the date of expiry of the decision to grant the previous institution's set-up. submitted.

  • 3 If, by way of derogation from the first paragraph, an institution board has submitted an application for a quality assurance in accordance with the time limit referred to in the second paragraph, the period of the decision in force shall be granted for the purpose of granting an institution to the competent institution of the establish quality management set up until the final decision on the application is taken.


Article 5a.13d. Assessment by accreditation body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The accreditation body shall take a decision within six months of the receipt of the application for a quality assurance set-up.

  • 2 The decision to grant a quality assurance institution shall enter into force from the day on which the previous decision to grant a set quality concern expires, or if an institution has for the first time a quality assurance institution. quality care is provided, starting from the day of publication of the decision.

  • 4 The accreditation body shall establish its opinion in a report which shall in any event contain the decision on the application for a set-off quality concern. The second to fifth paragraph of Article 5a.10 shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • 5 If the accreditation body decides not to provide quality assurance, an institution board cannot apply for quality care in the course of three years from the date of the decision.

  • 6 In the case of a general measure of management, it shall determine the cases in which the accreditation body may attach conditions to the decision to grant a set-quality management and what conditions may be required. If, in the opinion of the accreditation body, the conditions laid down are not fulfilled within two years, the institution shall lose two years from the date on which the decision to grant the institution's quality assurance has been taken. Quality management set-up. Our Minister shall present the draft general measure of directors as referred to in the first sentence to the Second Chamber of the States-General. The nomination for that general measure of management shall not be taken after the expiry of four weeks after the submission of such a measure.


Article 5a.13th. Impact assessment on quality assurance

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Where an institution board has a decision to grant a quality assurance institution, the training of the institution shall be assessed for accreditation on the basis of: Article 5a.13f and on the test of new training on the basis of Article 5a.13g , unless the setting board instructs the accreditation body to apply for accreditation or test new training on the basis of Title 2 .

  • 3 If an institution no longer has a quality assurance institution, the training of the institution shall be assessed by means of accreditation or test new training on the basis of Title 2 of this chapter with the exception of training courses for which a full application has been submitted to the accreditation body for the day on which the application for a set-up quality concern has been decided.

  • 4 If in the case of the provision of quality management conditions, conditions have been laid down under the general measure of management, referred to in Article 4 (1) of the Article 5a.13d, sixth paragraph , has a decision on the granting of accreditation on the basis of Article 5a.13f "New training" on the basis of Article 5a.13g on a full application lodged with the accreditation body during the year of the fulfilment of the conditions, a period of validity of two years.

  • 5 Where an institution based on the provisions of the second sentence of Article 5a.13d, sixth paragraph , in the case of quality assurance, the period of validity of a decision referred to in paragraph 4 shall be extended to one year from the date on which the accreditation body has notified the judgment which is not subject to the conditions set out in the Annex. ed. The institution board shall be required to apply for review of the aspects of the institution's assessment of the requirements of the competent authority within six months of the date on which the accreditation body, as referred to in the previous sentence, has been notified of the judgment. Article 5a.8, second paragraph, parts e to g , or Article 5a.10a (b), second paragraph, points (d) to (f) , to submit to the accreditation body for applications for accreditation or for a new training test carried out during the year in which the conditions for the set-up quality concern were applied.

  • 6 The accreditation body shall decide within three months on an application, as referred to in the fifth paragraph. In the case of a positive decision of the accreditation body on the application, the duration of the accreditation or re-training test shall be extended to six years. In case of a negative decision of the accreditation body Article 5a.12, first to fifth paragraphs , and Article 5a.12a applicable mutatis mutandis. If the accreditation body has not decided upon the application within one year of the date on which the institution has the opinion that the judgment has not been satisfied, the period of validity of a decision shall be as referred to in the fourth paragraph until the end of the year of study or, if necessary, until the end of the study year thereafter.

  • 7 Where, in the opinion of the accreditation body, the institution has fulfilled the conditions laid down in the granting of the institution's quality assurance, the period of validity of a decision referred to in paragraph 4 shall be taken into account. extended to six years.


Article 5a.13f. Limited assessment criteria for accreditation for institutions with set-off quality management

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In assessing the application for accreditation for an institution board training that has a quality assurance in place, consideration shall be given to the quality aspects that relate to the level of the institution's quality of the institution. training that assesses at least:

    • (a) the intended final level, having regard to what is internationally desirable or common;

    • b. the content and structure of the educational programme, the quality and quantity of the personnel and training specific facilities;

    • c. the realised final level, having regard to what is internationally desirable and common; and

    • d. the soundness of the students ' assessment, review and examination.


Article 5a.13g. Limited assessment criteria for new training in institutions with set-up quality management

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In assessing the application for a new training test for a proposed set-board training that has a quality assurance in place, consideration shall be given to the following aspects of quality which: relate at the level of the planned training, where at least it shall be assessed:

    • (a) the intended final level, having regard to what is internationally desirable or common;

    • b. the content and design of the educational programme, the quality and quantity of the personnel to be set up and the training specific facilities; and

    • c. the manner of assessment, review and examination of the students.


Title 3. Other provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.14. Information [ Expated by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 5a.15. Consequences of the destruction of decisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister may, on application of the power, mean in Article 22 (1) of the Framework Law on independent administrative bodies -to provide that an institution should, for a period to be determined by our Minister, retain its entitlement to finance as referred to in the Article 1.9, first paragraph , that a degree remains attached to the exams and that registration in the Central Register courses higher education, intended in Article 6.13 , it will not be terminated.


Article 5a.16. Job Neglect [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 6. Educational offer

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The titles 1 and 3 of this chapter refer to funded universities and colleges, at the Open University and at the philosophical universities of life.

  • 2 Title 2 has exclusive and Title 3 shall also cover legal persons for higher education.


Title 1. Training financed by institutions of higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.2. Educational offer

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution's management shall submit its intention to:

    in agreement with our Minister for the assessment of an effective educational offer and the assessment of an efficient division of tasks between the institutions, taking into account the whole of the provisions in the field of higher education. Article 7.17, third paragraph , shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • 2 Our Minister may be assisted by an advisory committee when assessing the intention referred to in the first paragraph.

  • 3 Taking into account the application, our Minister may restrict his consent to the provision of new training to the care of full-time, part-time or dual training. Our Secretary of State may also grant his agreement among other restrictions.

  • 4 In the case of ministerial arrangements, further requirements may be made to the application for assent.

  • 5 If there is the aggregation of existing training, our Minister may, on request of consent, provide that the institution of the institution shall, at the latest at the beginning of the sixth year of study, after the merger has taken place, may be undone without the agreement referred to in paragraph 1 being necessary.

  • 6 In the case of a new training in one of the public bodies of BES, the assessment takes into account the provisions in the field of higher education in the Netherlands and Aruba, Curaçao and Sint Maarten.

  • 7 The agreement of Our Minister shall lapse if, within 10 months of the agreement being given, the ad programme is not registered in the Central Register of higher education training, intended to be carried out in the Member States of the Article 6.13 .

  • 8 Our Secretary of State lays down policy rules on the basis of which he assesses applications. Changes to the policy rules shall be communicated to both Chambers of the States-General.


Article 6.3. Advisory Committee on Education [ Vertraps by 26-09-2003]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.4. Abstention rights in respect of new training courses [ Expats per 26-09-2003]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.5. Deprive rights of training and ad programmes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Secretary of State may decide that an ad programme shall be the subject of an ad programme which is subject to the training of Article 1.9, first and second paragraphs , being deprived of them, if:

    • (a) the provision of that training as an ad programme, having regard to the distribution and variety of facilities in higher education, and the profile of the institution which is responsible for the training in question. Ad programme, in reasonableness or no longer considered to be no longer effective, or

    • b. Do not or no longer be satisfied with what is determined by or under this Act regarding the quality of care, registration, education, examinations, promotions or pre-training requirements or admission requirements.

  • 2 In a decision as referred to in paragraph 1, our Secretary of State shall determine the date on which that decision is to take effect.


Article 6.6. Procedure for the collection of rights to training and ad programmes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister takes a decision on the basis of Article 6.5, first paragraph, part a , no later than eight weeks after the date on which he has made known his intention to withdraw the rights to the Second Chamber of the States-General. It shall simultaneously send a copy of this publication to the institution which enters into it. Our Minister shall inform the institution of his intention to deprive the Commission of any rights at least three months before it is announced to the Second Chamber.

  • 2 Before Our Minister makes a decision on the ground, mentioned in Article 6.5, first paragraph, part b , he shall give the institution's board a warning under the provision of a time limit within which such warning shall be due and shall be able to consult with him if necessary. The time limit within which the warning must be given shall be at least three months.


Article 6.7. Permission for specific selection criteria and higher tuition fees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At the request of the institution board, our minister may authorise candidates to be selected for training in accordance with criteria to be determined by the institution and in connection with the selected criteria. students to establish a tuition fee that is higher than the full statutory tuition fee based on the Article 7.45, fifth paragraph , as a general measure of administration has been adopted and is indexed in accordance with the rules in force.

  • 2 The consent of our minister relates to a particular course of training or to a particular programme within a course of training whose study and final terms are equal to that of training.

  • 3 Our minister shall grant his consent only if:

    • a. The application concerns small and intensive education, which is aimed at an above-average educational rate of return and where the activities are interlinked within and outside the curriculum; and

    • b. The consent shall not affect the quality or accessibility of higher education.

  • 4 The higher tuition fee referred to in the first member shall be at most five times the full statutory tuition fee based on Article 7.45, fifth paragraph , as a general measure of administration has been adopted and is indexed in accordance with the rules in force.


Article 6.7a. Obligations related to consent

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 To the consent of the Article 6.7, first paragraph , the following obligations for the institution management shall be connected:

    • (a) the selection of candidates;

    • (b) establishing a scheme for the selection criteria and procedures;

    • c. to establish a settlement of the criteria and procedure for dispensation of payment of higher tuition fees; and

    • d. cooperate in a one-off review of the practice as referred to in Article 6.7c .

  • 3 The setting board shall only select candidates on the basis of qualitative criteria. The number of qualitative selection criteria shall be at least two.


Article 6.7b. Application for authorisation and advisory by accreditation body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 Upon receipt of an application, the accreditation body shall, for the purpose of the decision of our Minister referred to in Article 6.7, first paragraph, give an opinion on:

  • 3 The accreditation body shall send the opinion, referred to in paragraph 2, accompanied by the application, within six months of the submission of the application to Our Minister.

  • 4 Our Minister may lay down detailed rules on the lodging of applications and the details and documents to be provided in this respect.


Article 6.7c. Review of the practice

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If Our Minister gives permission to the institution board as intended Article 6.7, first paragraph , has granted, allow the institution board the aspect referred to in Article 6.7, third paragraph, point a, of the relevant training or programme within the course of training referred to in Article 6.7, second paragraph, by the accreditation body six years after the -apply single-key to practice.

  • 2 When granting the consent, intended in Article 6.7 The Minister may provide that the review is to take place at a time other than the time referred to in paragraph 1, or that the review may be omitted, since there are no new findings to be expected of that review.

  • 3 The accreditation body shall send its findings in response to a review of the practice to our Minister.

  • 4 Our Minister may lay down detailed rules regarding the review of the practice, referred to in the first to the third paragraph.


Article 6.7d. Consent Revocation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister may grant the consent, Article 6.7, first paragraph , withdraw if:

  • a. the training or the programme within an education, as referred to in Article 6.7, second paragraph , no longer meets the aspect referred to in point (a) of Article 6.7, third paragraph;

  • b. training or programme within an education, intended in Article 6.7, second paragraph , it must be regarded as a new training;

  • (c) the quality or accessibility of higher education is endangered; or

  • d. the institution's management of the obligations, intended to Article 6.7a -Don't comply.


Article 6.8. Abstinence rights to new training [ Expantions by 26-09-2003]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 2. Legal persons responsible for higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.9. Grant rights linked to initial training of a legal person

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A legal person with full jurisdiction who wishes to obtain the power to grant degrees shall submit a request to our Minister on the presentation of a new training test.

  • 2 Following the request, referred to in paragraph 1, the inspection shall advise our Minister on the continuity of the legal person concerned and compliance with the relevant legal person of the Articles 1.12, second paragraph and 1.12a .

  • 3 In response to the request and on the basis of the opinion, our Minister or the Articles 1.12, 1st paragraph , or 1.12a the training provided by the relevant legal person shall be applicable. In any event, our Minister shall reject the request to grant degrees where the continuity of the legal person concerned or compliance with Article 1.12 (2) and (3) of this Regulation is not adequately ensured. Our Minister shall take a decision within 16 weeks of receipt of the request referred to in the first paragraph.

  • 4 The second and third paragraphs shall apply mutatis mutandis where the legal person concerned transfers the training to another legal person with full jurisdiction over which the Articles 1.12 or 1.12a are not applicable at the time of the transfer.

  • 5 If by the legal person referred to in paragraph 1, no higher education in the Management Central Register is intended to be carried out in the Central Register. Article 6.13 , registered training courses are more or more provided by the legal person only in the course of a run-off as referred to in Article 5a.12 the legal person shall be able to grant its degree of retraining only after application of the first to third members.


Article 6.10. Reproduction of rights linked to training provided by legal persons for higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister may decide that training or all training, or an Ad Programme or all Ad Programmes, provided by a legal person for higher education, shall be entitled to be the rights mentioned in the Article 1.12, first paragraph , where the continuity of the legal person concerned or the fulfilment of Article 1.12, second and third paragraphs, is not or is no longer guaranteed.

  • 2 A decision on the basis of paragraph 1 shall not, on the basis of the examinations of the training or of all the training courses in question, be an Ad programme or any ad programme as referred to in Article 2 (2). Article 7.10a Other Article 7.10b is connected, and that registration in the Central Register courses higher education, intended in Article 6.13 , terminated.

  • 4 Before making a decision under paragraph 1, our Minister shall give the institution board a warning under the provision of a time limit within which such warning shall be due and, if appropriate, consultation with him in this regard. place can be found. The time limit within which the warning must be given shall be at least three months.

  • 5 If our Minister has taken a decision as referred to in the first paragraph in respect of all training courses provided by all Ad programmes by the relevant legal person, this legal person may only re-grade as intended in Article 7.10a Other Article 7.10b Grant after application of Article 6.9 .


Article 6.11. Abstention rights linked to the designation of new training [ Exparising per 26-09-2003]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.12. Withdrawal indication of institution [ Expappointed by 04-07-2013]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 3. The Central Repository Training Courses in Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.12a. Starting provisions Title 3 [ Expaed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.13. The Central Repository Training Courses in Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Central Register of Higher Education Training is a systematically ordered collection of data relating to the training courses provided by the higher education institutions. Our Minister is in charge of the construction, management and publication of the register and the provision of information from the register.

  • 2 [ Red: Expated.]

  • 3 In the case of general management measures, the establishment and operation of the Management Central Register shall be governed by a higher education system. It contains provisions on the provision of information from the register. In doing so, provision of information to persons other than the boards of the institutions to which this law relates shall be subject to payment of a fee established by the general measure of administration. The general measure of management shall include the format of the register in parts and, where necessary, sub-elements. The components cover areas of education. The classification contains at least parts for the following areas of education: education, agriculture and natural environment, engineering, law, language and culture, and health care. Classification shall also include in the field of education, in each case, the teaching training sub-component in the field of art, and for the language and culture component, at least the sub-part training in the field of art.

  • 4 Central registry training courses higher education includes of each training as intended in Article 7.3a the following information:

    • a. the name of the training course and the institution providing the training provided in English and, if desired, in English or any other international language that is common,

    • b. or higher vocational education or scientific education;

    • (c) whether training has been accredited or has undergone a positive training test as well as its period of validity;

    • d. the classification in the register;

    • e. if it is a joint training program or a joint graduate program as intended in Article 7.3c For the purpose of which institutions the training or graduate programme is to be provided,

    • f. fulltime, part-time or dual character,

    • g. the student body, where master training is indicated or determined by law, by the institution or, as regards master's degree in scientific education, at his request by Our Minister,

    • h. Or a propedeutic exam is attached to a bachelor's degree,

    • (i) whether it concerns training on a specific profession, for which requirements have been established by or pursuant to the law,

    • j. or application is given to Article 7.25, fourth paragraph ,

    • k. or requirements concerning the performance of operations as referred to in Article 7.27 to be set,

    • l. the municipality, the communes, the public body BES or the public bodies of BES where the training is established,

    • m. the time limit set by the institution pursuant to Article 5a.12, first paragraph, fourth sentence, point (b),

    • n. the Minister by Our Minister on the grounds of Article 5a.12, sixth paragraph , or 5a.15 , fixed period,

    • o. if application is given to Article 5a.12a : the period laid down in paragraph 1 of that Article, and the decision taken by the accreditation body pursuant to the fifth paragraph of that Article,

    • The time at which the first entry for the training is possible,

    • q. if the training will no longer be taken care of, the time at which the registration will be terminated, as well as the time when the first registration is in the propedeutic phase of the training or, if that phase is not set, the First period in a bachelor's degree in scientific education with a study load of 60 credits, is no longer possible,

    • r. if Article 5a.9, seventh paragraph , applies: the time limit laid down by the accreditation body referred to in the second sentence of that article,

    • s. or Our Minister in relation to any training has granted permission for the handling of specific selection criteria, intended in Article 6.7 , and in conjunction with that, for the purpose of establishing a higher tuition fee as provided for in that Article,

    • t. or within the course of the training a program is offered in respect of which Our Minister has authorized the handling of specific selection criteria, intended in Article 6.7 , and in conjunction with that, for the purpose of establishing a higher tuition fee as provided for in that Article,

    • you. or our minister has granted permission to establish a higher tuition fee as intended in Article 6.8 ,

    • v. or within the course of training an Ad programme is offered and whether that programme has a full-time, part-time, or dual character;

    • w. or within the course of training an accelerated route is offered as intended Article 7.9a ,

    • x. the addition, intended in Article 7.10a, second paragraph Which is tied to a degree.

  • 5 Central registry training courses higher education includes of each training as intended in Article 7.3b :

    • (a) the name of the training and the legal person from which the training is based; and

    • b. The data referred to in paragraph 4 (4) (b) to (g), (m), (h), (q) and (w).

  • 6 Our Minister shall present the draft general measure of management, referred to in paragraph 3, to the Second Chamber of the States-General. The nomination for that general measure of management shall not be taken after the expiry of 30 days after the submission of such a measure.


Article 6.14. The registration procedure

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution board may sign up for registration for registration following the granting of accreditation. The institution board may sign up for registration in an education which the institution intends to provide, after having received a positive response to the new training test. The setting board can sign an Ad program that the institution intends to provide for registration, after that Ad program has successfully undergone the new Ad program key. If there is the undo of a merge as referred to in Article 6.2, fifth paragraph , the setting board shall resubmit the original training courses for registration.

  • 2 The notification shall be given in accordance with the information set out in the Annex. Article 6.13, fourth paragraph . In notifying an accredited training course, the institution board shall add the accreditation report, which is intended to be used in the Article 5a.10, first paragraph In notifying an education that has undergone the test of new training with a positive result, the setting board shall add the report of the new training test and the decision of the consent of Our Minister, as referred to in Article 4 (2). Article 6.2, first paragraph . If the format of the Central Register training courses does not meet the judgement of the institution board, the institution board shall be sufficient to indicate the component which, in its opinion, is the subject of the training course It's the best way to define the Ad programme. The institution board that signs a master ' s degree in scientific education for registration adds, if necessary, the decision of Our Minister, intended Article 7.4a, fifth paragraph, first sentence -I'm in. The setting board that signs an Ad program for registration adds the report of the new Ad program key and the decision of consent of Our Minister, referred to in Section 6.2, first paragraph, at.

  • 3 Our Minister shall, within a reasonable period of time, register the ad programme according to the information provided by the institution in the Central Register of higher education courses.

  • 4 If the data are not complete or the classification in the Management Central Register courses higher education in the judgment of Our Minister in reasonableness cannot be regarded as appropriate for training as far as it is concerned, are not complete from the data, the Ad programme, our Minister shall give the institution's authority the opportunity to review, within a period to be determined by our Minister, the missing information in the form of a review of the classification. In the case of information referred to in the third sentence of paragraph 2, the Secretary-General shall fix the time limit within the time limit set out in the second paragraph. Article 5a.11, sixth paragraph, part c or d Without prejudice to Article 6.15 Our Minister refuses to register in the register only if our Minister has not received, or has not received, the data fully within this period, if he finds that the data are not correct, or if the revised format is to the The judgment of our Minister in reasonable terms cannot be regarded as appropriate for the training of the individual, in so far as it concerns the non-or non-receipt of the data within the period prescribed or the data are not accurate, the Ad program.

  • 5 If Our Minister finds that data in the Central Register of higher education courses are incomplete or incorrect or the breakdown is inappropriate for training, the data or classification may be adapted by Our Minister. Our minister has the same authority as far as it is incomplete or inaccurate of the data for the Ad programme.


Article 6.15. Registration Termination

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 4 The notice referred to in point (a) of paragraph 1 shall be made by 28 February of the calendar year preceding the first year of study in which the invitation to tender for the propedeutic phase of the bachelor training or, if that phase is not, the the registration of the bachelor or training programme or the registration of the master's training is no longer open.


Title 4

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 6.16. Special provisions in the field of art and continuing training in building arts [ Expandsof 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 7. Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 This chapter covers at universities and colleges, at the Open University and at the philosophical universities of the world.


Title 1. Education, exams and promotions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. Education and examinations

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.2. Language

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The teaching is given and the exams are taken from Dutch. By way of derogation from the first sentence, a different language may be used:

  • a. When it concerns training in relation to such language,

  • b. where the teaching is given by a university lecturer in a host college, or

  • c. If the specific nature, establishment or quality of the education, or the origin of the students, is required, in accordance with a code of conduct adopted by the institution.


Article 7.3. Training and teaching units

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The education is offered by the institution in the form of training courses.

  • 2 Training is a coherent set of teaching units aimed at achieving defined objectives in the field of knowledge, understanding and skills which the person who completes the training needs to have. An educational unit may refer to practical preparation for occupational and vocational training in dual training, insofar as such activities are accompanied by the institution's management. take place.

  • 3 A test is attached to each training. Each educational unit is a tent of a tent.

  • 4 Each training will be at the foot of Title 3 of Chapter 6 registered in the Central Register of higher education courses.

  • 5 The examination, as referred to in paragraph 3, which has been completed by good results and the working documents produced for the purpose thereof shall be retained by the institution for a period of at least seven years.

  • 5 The setting board may change the name of an education in the context of the granting of accreditation or interim if its name is better suited to what is common within the visitative group or the sector. Interim change may take place only after agreement has been approved by the accreditation body. The accreditation body shall agree to meet the criteria set out in the Article 5a.2 (2a) (b) .

  • 6 If the setting board decides to terminate an education or an Ad programme within a course of training, students enrolled in that course or that Ad programme shall be given the opportunity to complete their training, the Ad programme to continue without interruption in that institution. In addition, a period of time which shall not exceed the duration of the training course of the training course of the ad programme, related to the student concerned, plus one year, shall not exceed the duration of the training course of the training course.


Article 7.3a. Bachelor and Masters courses

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The following shall be distinguished within scientific education:

    • a. bachelor's training courses; and

    • b. Master training courses, following the bachelor training courses referred to in point (a).

  • 2 The following shall be distinguished within higher vocational education:

    • a. bachelor's training courses; and

    • b. Master training courses, following the bachelor training courses referred to in point (a).


Article 7.3b. Post-initial Masters Courses

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In addition to the training provided for in Article 7.3a, the following shall be distinguished within higher education:

  • a. postinitial master training in scientific education; and

  • b. Post-initial Master degree courses in higher vocational education.


Article 7.3c. Joint training or joint graduation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 For tasks and powers other than those referred to in paragraph 1 which relate to a training or a graduate course, the institution boards shall establish in an agreement which institution management shall be responsible for the exercise of of these. The Netherlands institutions shall continue to be jointly responsible for the exercise of these tasks and powers vis--vis third parties outside the institution.

  • 3 If a student has registered with an institution for a joint training or a graduate course, that student shall also be enrolled in the training of the other institution to the extent that it is a Dutch institution.

  • 4 If an institution board as referred to in the second sentence of the first paragraph has jurisdiction to determine the amount of tuition fees, in the case of a foreign institution, the amount of the tuition fee shall be determined. for higher education for a joint training or a graduate course within the meaning of this Article, for the determination of the amount of tuition fees not the minimum amount established by or under the law.


Article 7.3d. Free education programme in science education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A student enrolled in a training course in scientific education, himself from teaching units provided by an institution, can assemble a program to which an exam is attached. If necessary, the institution board shall appoint an examination board to be responsible for the decision referred to in the first sentence of this Decision.


Article 7.4. Studio space and credits

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The student body of each training course and each education unit shall be expressed in credits by the institution's board. The study period for a study year shall be sixty credits. Sixty study points are equal to 1680 hours of study.

  • 2 Training shall be arranged in such a way that a student is able to obtain the number of study points on which the study period is based on a year of study.

  • 3 The institution of the institution shall determine the annual study burden of part-time training.


Article 7.4a. Study training courses in scientific education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The student body of a bachelor's degree in science education is 180 credits. By way of derogation from the first sentence, the student body of a bachelor ' s degree in scientific education may amount to a maximum of 240 credits if, for that purpose, our Minister for that training has taken a decision on the basis of the accreditation report of that training. The decision, referred to in the second sentence, shall determine the subject of the training course of the training.

  • 2 Subject to the provisions of the third to seventh members, the course of a master's training in scientific education shall be 60 credits.

  • 3 The course of study of master training courses as a teacher for the period of preparatory higher education in subjects of secondary education shall be at least 60 credits and a maximum of 120 credits. By way of derogation from the first sentence, the student body of training courses referred to by Our Minister, as referred to in that sentence, shall be at least 120 credits and a maximum of 180 credits. The setting board shall determine the course of the training course of the training.

  • 4 The course of master training for the profession of res judication of a particular field of science is 120 credits.

  • 5 The study of the Master ' s courses in scientific education to be established by Our Minister amounts to 120 credits. Our Minister may provide that the student body of Master 's degree courses in scientific education co-directed at a life-based post or profession is 180 credits and that the student body of Master' s courses will be in the scientific education with a foreign institution as intended in Article 7.3c 90 credits.

  • 6 The study of master training for the profession of doctor, the profession of veterinary surgeon, the profession of pharmacist, dental profession, and the profession of clinical technologist is 180 credits.

  • 7 The student body of master ' s degree courses of medicine, clinical researcher is at 240 study points.

  • 8 The setting board may provide that training as referred to in the second paragraph shall have a greater degree of study than 60 credit points.


Article 7.4b. Study training courses in higher vocational education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The student body of a bachelor's degree in higher vocational education is 240 credits.

  • 2 The student body of a master ' s degree in higher vocational education is 60 credits.

  • 3 The course of study of master ' s degree courses in the field of art is at least 60 credits and up to 120 credits. The setting board shall determine the course of the training course of the training.

  • 4 The course of the master ' s training courses as a teacher of secondary education of the first degree in general subjects is 90 credits.

  • 5 The studio student of the master trainings advanced nurse practitioner is 120 credits.

  • 6 The study machine of the master training physician assistant is 150 study points.

  • 7 The graduate student of the master ' s degree courses in the field of building art is 240 credits.

  • 8 The setting board may provide that training as referred to in the second paragraph shall have a greater degree of study than 60 credit points.


Article 7.5. Care of university first-degree teacher training courses; special conditions [ Expired by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.6. Professional requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Where an institution offers an education, focused on a particular profession, and has been asked by or under the law for the knowledge, understanding and skills involved in the training to that profession. In particular, the institution management shall ensure that those who pursue such training are at least able to meet those requirements.

  • 2 To the requirements referred to in paragraph 1, those laid down in Directive No C of the European Parliament and of the Council on doctors, nurses, midwives, dentists, veterinarians, architects and pharmacists 2005 /36/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of the European Union of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications (PbEU L 255).

  • In particular, training courses aimed at particular professions include practical preparation for the exercise of the profession.

  • 4 The first and third paragraphs shall apply mutatis mutandis in respect of training courses leading to a certificate as referred to in Article 3 (1) of the Treaty. Article 33 (1a) of the Secondary Education Act and as referred to in Article 80, third paragraph, of the Secondary Education Act BES.


Article 7.7. Full-time, part-time and dual establishment of training courses

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Training of funded institutions may be set up full-time, part-time or dual and will be designated as full-time, part-time or part-time training.

  • 2 A dual course of training shall be arranged in such a way that the pursuit of education shall be alternated with professional practice in relation to that education for one or more periods. This profession does not take place in scientific education during the propedeutic phase of a bachelor ' s degree or, if that phase is not established, during the first period in that training with a study machine of 60 Credits. The part of a dual course of training which consists of following education is referred to as a teaching part.

  • 3 The study load of the part of the dual course of training formed by the vocational training course, is a number of credits to be argued by the institution in the teaching and examination arrangements.

  • 4 In the education and examination arrangements, dual training shall be indicated:

    • a. the minimum study load of the teaching part,

    • b. the duration of the period or the joint period of time of the periods spent at least in the professional practice; and

    • c. the minimum degree of study of the part of the course of training formed by the professional exercise.

  • 5 Vocational training within a dual course shall be carried out on the basis of an agreement concluded by the institution, the student and the company concerned or the relevant organisation. The Agreement shall govern the rights and obligations of the Parties and shall include, in accordance with or pursuant to this Law, at least the following provisions on:

    • a. the duration of the contract and the duration of the period or periods of the exercise of the profession;

    • b. The guidance of the student,

    • c. that part of the qualities, intended in Article 7.13, second paragraph, point (c) , that the student should realize, during the period or periods of occupation, and the assessment thereof, and

    • d. the cases in which and the manner in which the agreement may be dissolved prematurely.


Article 7.7a. Dual establishment of courses in universities [ Expale by 25-01-2003]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.8. Propedeutic phase and propedeutic exam

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution board may set up a propedeutic phase in a bachelor ' s degree in science education.

  • 2 A bachelor ' s degree in higher vocational education comprises a propedeutic phase, which may have different content for students as referred to in Article 7.9a, first and second members.

  • 3 The propedeutic phase is a propedeutic examination as far as the education and examination scheme is not otherwise determined.

  • 4 The study load of the propedeutic phase, to which a propedeutic exam is attached, is 60 credits. The study load of the propedeutic phase of a dual bachelor ' s degree course is 60 credits.

  • 5 The propedeutic phase is used for the purpose of Article 7.8b be so arranged that there is an understanding of the contents of the bachelor's training with the possibility of reference and selection at the end of that phase.


Article 7.8a. Associate-degreeprogramme

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board may set up an associate-degreeprogramme in undergraduate education in higher vocational education.

  • 2 The study load of the programme shall be at least 120 credits.

  • 4 If our Minister has granted approval as referred to in the third paragraph, at least half of the programme, including at least the graduation phase and the final examination, shall be provided by the higher education institution. If a part of the Ad programme is being implemented by another vocational education institution as intended in Article 1.4.1 of the Education and Vocational Education Act is Article 7.34, fifth paragraph , mutatis mutandis.

  • 5 A person to whom a degree as intended in Article 7.10b, first paragraph , has been granted, has the right to pursue his bachelor ' s degree in higher vocational education. In addition, an institution board may prescribe in the education and examination system the teaching units that have yet to be followed within the relevant bachelor's training.


Article 7.8b. Study advice propedeutic phase

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution board of a university, college or philosophical university will bring every student no later than the end of its first year of registration for the propedeutic phase of a full-time or dual bachelors training advice on the continuation of his studies inside or outside the bachelor ' s degree course. In the case of a part-time bachelor ' s degree, the setting board shall arrange the time when that opinion is delivered.

  • 2 Without prejudice to paragraph 1, the institution board may issue the opinion to the student as long as it has not passed the propedeutic exam successfully.

  • 3 In an opinion as referred to in paragraphs 1 or 2, the institution may, within the period referred to in paragraph 2, subject to training appointed by the institution responsible for that purpose, but not earlier than the end of the period of employment of the first year of registration, connecting a rejection. This refusal may be given only if, in the opinion of the institution, the student, having regard to his/her personal circumstances, must not be regarded as suitable for training by failing to obtain the results of his study. comply with the requirements established by the Steering Board on the subject. The setting board may make a deadline for the rejection of the decision. The institution's board may extend the rejection to training which has the propedeutic examination in common with the relevant training. The institution board may make use of the power under this paragraph only if it provides for the provision of the facilities in the propedeutic stage of the training in question to ensure that good study progress is achieved.

  • 4 Before the embarkation administration is dismissed, it shall give a warning to the relevant student under a reasonable period of time within which the results of the study shall be improved to the satisfaction of that administration. The setting board shall inform the student before a refusal to take the opportunity to be heard.

  • 5 Of the student who has been rejected under the third paragraph, the entry for the relevant training shall be terminated to the institution concerned. The student may not be reenrolled to that institution for that training unless the setting board has applied to the third sentence of the third sentence of the third paragraph or unless the person requests to be published at a later date. entered for the relevant training, and thereby satisfy the institution's board of directors that he will be able to follow that training with fruit.

  • 6 The setting board shall lay down detailed rules for the implementation of the preceding paragraphs. These rules shall, in any case, relate to the results of the study and the provisions referred to in paragraph 3 and to the period referred to in the fourth paragraph.

  • 7 In the case of a general measure of management, the personal circumstances referred to in paragraph 3 shall be determined by the institution's management in his assessment.

  • 8 For the purposes of this Article, "propedeutic phase" includes the first period in a bachelor ' s degree in scientific education with a study of 60 credits. For the purposes of this article, "propedeutic exam" also includes the exams, connected to educational units in the first period in a bachelor ' s degree in scientific education with a joint study machine of 60 Credits.


Article 7.9. Reference in postpropedeutic phase

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If after the propedeutic phase a bachelor's training is more than a graduate course, the institution's board of directors may decide, with respect to training courses designated for that purpose by the institution of the institution, that one for that course of study shall Enrolled student only has access to one or more of them to be given graduation directions. The institution's authority may make use of the power under this paragraph only if the nature and content of the different training courses differ in such a way as to justify the application of that competence.

  • In the application of the first paragraph, the institution shall base its decision on:

    • a. on the student's study results;

    • b. on the study programme followed by the student, or

    • c. on a combination of a and b.

    The institution's administration shall inform the student before a decision is taken on the occasion.

  • 3 In the weighing of the study results referred to in subparagraph (a) and (c) of the second paragraph, the setting-board shall take into account the personal circumstances of the student. A general measure of management shall specify the personal circumstances of the institution's assessment of the institution in its assessment.

  • 4 In the weighing of the student ' s study programme referred to in subparagraph (b) and (c) of the second paragraph, the institution board or program components selected by the student shall be adequately aligned with the student as desired by the student. Graduation direction.

  • 5 The setting board shall lay down detailed rules for the implementation of this Article. These rules shall cover, in each case, the difference in graduation headings referred to in paragraph 1, on the study results referred to in paragraph 3, and on the connection of programme components and the course of training, Referred to in the fourth paragraph.

  • 6 For the purposes of this Article, "propedeutic phase" also includes the first period in a bachelor ' s degree in scientific education with a study of 60 credits.


Article 7.9a. Admission to accelerated path directed towards students with a VWO diploma

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 An institution board can offer an accelerated trajectory within a bachelor ' s degree in higher vocational education that is accessible to students with a diploma as intended Article 7.24, second paragraph, point (a) or (b) or one on the basis of Article 7.28, second paragraph In the case of a ministerial arrangement as at least equivalent, the institution's body of directors shall have at least equivalent qualifications. A student who satisfies the condition referred to in the first sentence and the other conditions of registration shall be registered for an accelerated journey if he so requests.

  • 2 The setting board may also decide to allow a student other than the one referred to in paragraph 1 to the accelerated path if he has demonstrated the suitability for that route in the judgement of the institution.


Article 7.9b. Selection for a special section aimed at achieving a higher level

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If an institution's board of directors offers a special route within a training course, aimed at achieving a higher level of knowledge of students, the institution may select students to do so.

  • 2 The setting board shall lay down rules governing the selection, referred to in paragraph 1.


Article 7.9ba. Study progress audit, referred to in Article 17fa of the Law on Study Funding [ Expelling per 01-09-2000]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.9bb. Study progress audit, referred to in Article 17fb of the Law on Study Funding [ Expelling per 01-09-2000]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.9c. Absence of data by study progress monitoring [ Exp& es by 01-09-2013]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.9d. Follow the final exam successfully

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The setting board shall do so before the end of the second month following the month in which a student is intended to Article 5.7 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 , the final exam has come to an end, of that communication to Our Minister. It sends a message of sending it to the person at the same time as the message.


Article 7.9e. Supply of data relief on the basis of Article 7.31a [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.9f. Supply data dual training [ Expale per 01-09-2000]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.10. Exams and exams

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Each exam shall include an examination of the knowledge, understanding and skills of the examiner, as well as the assessment of the results of that examination.

  • 2 If the examinations of the teaching units belonging to a training or propedeutic phase of a bachelor of education have been completed, the examination has been taken, provided that the examination board does not provide that the examination shall also include: an examination as referred to in the first paragraph by the Commission itself.

  • 3 The institution board is responsible for the practical organisation of exams and exams.


Article 7.10a. Provision of degrees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall grant a Bachelor 's degree and Master' s degree to the person who, with good consequence, is the final examination of a bachelor's degree in scientific education and the final examination of a master ' s degree in the field of study. the scientific education has come. Depending on the subject area in which the complete final examination of a bachelor's training is completed by the completed master's examination of a master 's degree, the degree to which it is awarded shall be added to the degree to which it is awarded' or Arts '. Or "or Science". In the case of a ministerial arrangement, an addition other than that of the second sentence referred to in the second sentence may be established for training or a group of training courses in respect of a degree referred to in this paragraph.

  • 2 The institution of the institution shall grant a Bachelor 's degree and Master' s degree to the person who, with good consequence, holds the final examination of a bachelor's degree in higher vocational education as the final examination of a master ' s degree in the field of study. Higher vocational education. Depending on the subject area in which the complete final examination of a bachelor's training is the result of a master 's completed master' s examination, the degree to which it is awarded shall be awarded to the person who has been awarded the master. addition connected on the basis of Article 5a.2 (2a) (a) , with positive results has been reviewed.

  • 3 The management of the legal person referred to in Article 5a.1, second paragraph , the degree Master grants to the person who, with good consequence, is the final examination of a master ' s degree as intended in Article 7.3b (a) or (b) -It has come. The second and third sentences of the first paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to a master ' s training as referred to in Article 7.3b, point (a). The second sentence of the second paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to a master ' s training as referred to in Article 7.3b (b).

  • 4 The setting board may supplement the degree and the addition by indicating the subject area or professional field to which the degree relates.


Article 7.10b. Granting of the degree Associate degree

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.11. Certificates and statements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 To ensure that an exam has been completed by a good result, the relevant examiner or examiners shall present a document relating to it.

  • 2 To ensure that the examination has been completed, a certificate shall be issued by the examination board after the institution has declared that the procedural requirements for the issue have been fulfilled. Each training course shall be awarded one certificate. The certificate of the examination carried out with good results shall state relevant information, including in any case:

    • a. the name of the institution and the training referred to in the register, as specified in the Register; Article 6.13 , it is concerned,

    • b. which components included the examination,

    • c. taking into account, where appropriate, the competence to which it is empowered to Article 7.6, 1st paragraph ,

    • d. the degree to which it is intended to Article 7.10a , first or second paragraph, has been granted; and

    • e. at which time the training is last accredited or at what time the training of the new training test, intended to be carried out in the course of Article 5a.11, second paragraph , has been subjected to good results, and

    • f. if it is a joint training or a joint graduation direction as intended Article 7.3b the name of the institution or, in the case of a joint training, institutions which have or have taken care of the training or graduation referred to.

  • 3 The person entitled to the award of a certificate may, in accordance with rules to be determined by the institution of the institution, request the examination board not to do so yet.

  • 4 The examination board shall attach to a certificate of the final examination carried out with a good result, a supplement. The purpose of the supplement is to provide an insight into the nature and content of the completed training, including with a view to ensuring international recognition of training. In each case, the supplement shall contain the following information:

    • a. the name of the training course and the institution providing the training,

    • (b) whether it is a training in scientific education or training in higher vocational education;

    • c. a description of the content of the training, and

    • d. the study course of the training.

    The supplement shall be drawn up in English or English and shall comply with the European agreed standard format.

  • 5 The person who has performed more than one exam with good results and who cannot be awarded a certificate as referred to in paragraph 2 shall, on request, receive an attestation to be issued by the relevant examination board which shall in any event be the examinations made have been carried out by him with good consequence.


Article 7.12. Examination Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Each training or group of training courses in the institution shall have an examination board.

  • 2 The examination board is the body which determines in an objective and expert manner whether a student meets the conditions governing the teaching and examination arrangements with regard to knowledge, insight and skills necessary for obtaining the examination. a degree.


Article 7.12a. Appointment and composition of the examination board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board shall set up the examination board and appoint the members on the basis of their expertise in the field of the relevant training or training group.

  • 2 The setting board shall ensure that the independent and expert functioning of the examination board is adequately ensured.

  • 3 In the appointment of the members of the examination board, the institution shall ensure that:

    • (a) at least one member is associated with the training in question or one of the training courses which is part of the training group;

    • (b) at least one member comes from outside the relevant training or from one of the training courses included in the training group;

    • c. Members of the institution board or persons who otherwise bear financial responsibility within the institution shall not be appointed.

  • 4 Before the appointment of a member, the institution shall hear the members of the relevant examination board.


Article 7.12b. Tasks and powers of examination board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In addition to the tasks and powers specified in the Articles 7.11 and 7.12, 2nd Member , an examination committee shall have the following tasks and powers:

    • a. Ensuring the quality of the exams and exams without prejudice Article 7.12c ,

    • (b) the adoption of directives and indications within the framework of the education and examination system, as provided for in Article 7.13 , in order to assess and determine the results of examinations and examinations,

    • c. to grant permission to a student by the most appropriate examination commission to be a program composed by that student as intended. Article 7.3d to follow, the examination of which leads to the acquisition of a degree, in which the examination board shall also indicate the training of the institution which is considered to be the programme for the application of this Law;

    • d. the granting of exemption for the presentation of one or more examinations; and

    • e. to ensure the quality of the organization and the procedures around exams and exams.

  • 2 If a student or extraneus frauds, the examination board may deprive the data subject of the right to apply one or more exams or exams to be given by the examination board, for a period of time to be determined by the examination board. a maximum of one year. In the event of serious fraud, the institution's board may, on a proposal from the Committee of the Examination Board, definitively terminate the registration for the training of the person concerned.

  • 3 The examination board shall lay down rules on the implementation of the tasks and powers referred to in points (a), (b) and (d) of the first paragraph, and of the second paragraph, and on the measures which it may take in that regard. The examination board may, under conditions to be set by it, provide that not all cases of examination have to be carried out in a good manner to establish that the examination has been completed successfully.

  • 4 If a student submits to the exam board a request or complaint where an examiner is involved who is a member of the examination board, the examiner concerned shall not take part in the examination of the request or complaint.

  • 5 The examination committee shall draw up an annual report on its activities. The examination board shall provide the report to the institution board or to the dean.


Article 7.12c. Examiners

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The examination committee shall designate examiners for the taking-up of examinations and the results of the examinations.

  • 2 The examiners shall provide the examination board with the information requested.


Article 7.13. Education and examination arrangements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall establish an education and examination system for each training or training group offered by the institution. The education and examination arrangements shall include adequate and clear information on training or training groups.

  • 2 The education and examination arrangements shall, without prejudice to the provisions of this law, lay down, by training or training group, the applicable procedures and rights and obligations with regard to teaching and examinations. It shall include at least:

    • a. the content of the training and of the examinations attached thereto;

    • b. The content of the graduation directions within an education,

    • c. the qualities in the field of knowledge, insight and skills that a student must have acquired upon termination of the course of training,

    • d. where necessary, the establishment of practical exercises;

    • e. the training course of the training and of each of the teaching units forming part of it;

    • f. the detailed rules referred to in Articles 7.8b, sixth paragraph , and 7.9, fifth member ,

    • g. for which master training application has been applied to Article 7.4a, 8th paragraph ,

    • h. the number and order of the examinations as well as the moments at which they can be made,

    • the full-time, part-time or dual establishment of the training,

    • j. where necessary, the order in which, the periods within which and the number of times per year of study which is given the opportunity to complete the examinations and examinations;

    • k. where necessary, the period of validity of the examinations carried out successfully, subject to the authority of the examination board extending that period of validity,

    • (l) whether the examinations are made orally, in writing or in any other way, subject to the jurisdiction of the examination board in particular cases to be determined otherwise,

    • m. the manner in which students with a disability or chronic disease are reasonably given the opportunity to lay down the exams,

    • n. the open may of oral examinations, subject to the jurisdiction of the examination board in special cases, to be determined otherwise,

    • (o) the period within which the results of the examinations are to be made known and whether and how this period may be derogated from,

    • p. the manner in which and the period of time during which the person who made a written examination obtains access to his assessed work,

    • q. the manner in which and the period of time during which questions and orders may be taken, put or given in a written reduction, and the standards to which the assessment has taken place;

    • r. the grounds on which the examination board may grant an exemption from the travel of one or more of the first examinations or examinations made in higher education or in the field of knowledge or skills acquired outside the higher education system. exams,

    • where necessary, that it has been carried out with good results from examinations of the subject is a condition for the admission to the presentation of other examinations;

    • the obligation to take part in practical exercises with a view to admission to the examination of the relevant exam, where necessary, subject to the power of the examination board to grant an exemption from that obligation, not under replacement requirements,

    • you. Monitoring of study progress and individual study guidance

    • v. where applicable: the manner in which the selection of students for a special section within an education, intended in Article 7.9b , takes place, and

    • x. the actual design of education.

  • 3 In the education and examination arrangements, it is stated how a person is entitled to pursue his bachelor degree in higher vocational education, intended in Article 7.8a, fifth paragraph , it is possible to implement it and what requirements it must meet.


Article 7.14. Assessment of education and examination arrangements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution board shall ensure a regular assessment of the teaching and examination arrangements and shall weigh, in order to monitor and, where appropriate, update of the study burden, the time span which results from it for the students.


Article 7.15. Provision of information to students and prospective students

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution board shall provide information to students and prospective students in such a way as to:

    • a. the institution;

    • b. Education to be followed in general terms,

    • c. the differentiation in the training offer,

    • d. the selection of students; and

    • e. The training names,

    that these students and aspiring students are able to compare the training opportunities, to form a good judgment on the content and furning of the teaching and examinations followed or to be prepared and to prepare well for the requirements.

  • 2 The representation of the institutions and the relevant student advocacy organisations shall make joint arrangements regarding the specifications of the information referred to in the first paragraph. If they fail to do so, it is possible for ministerial arrangements to provide detailed specifications of the content and form of the information necessary for the comparison of training courses and the selection of appropriate training. Different sets of specifications may be set out in the ministerial arrangement for different groups of institutions.


Article 7.16. Recognised competences recognised

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution board may establish procedures and criteria for the recognition of acquired competences for those who are not registered.


Section 2. Location of training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.17. Location of training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Without prejudice to the second paragraph, training shall be provided in the municipality or public body BES where such training is shown in the Central Register of higher education training, intended for the purpose of Article 6.13 It is established.

  • 2 The setting board may decide whether or not to provide training, part thereof or the Ad Programme or any part thereof that is offered within that training for a specified period of time in one or more other communes or one or more public Establish BES bodies. He shall submit to our Minister the intention referred to in the first sentence for a subsidiary establishment or a transfer of training.

  • 3 Prior to taking an assent decision as referred to in paragraph 2, our Minister shall give the appropriate institutions the opportunity to give their views on the application.

  • 4 The consent of Our Minister shall lapse if the training is not registered in the Central Register of higher education courses of the Centre within six months of the assent of the Minister, Article 6.13 .


Article 7.17a. Termination of establishment training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister may decide that an education or an ad programme which is located in two or more municipalities, in two or more public bodies BES or in one or more municipalities and one or more public entities BES, no longer be in one of its decisions. The said municipality or public body BES is established, if the care of the training or Ad programme in that municipality or public body BES, having regard to the whole of the facilities in the field of higher education, is in reasonable may not be considered as being or is no longer appropriate.

  • 2 In its decision, Our Minister shall also determine the moment from which the training or ad programme is no longer established in the municipality or public body of BES, referred to in paragraph 1.


Paragraph 3. The Promotions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.18. Grant of degree Doctor; access and establishment promotion

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The college of promotions of a university, the Open University or a philosophical university has the power to grant the degree of Doctor on the basis of the promotion.

  • 2 To the promotion has access any who:

    • a. to whom on the grounds of Article 7.10a, first, second or third members , the degree Master was granted,

    • b. as an aptitude test until the independent practice of science has written a thesis or has produced a pilot design; and

    • c. has fulfilled the requirements, stated in the Article 7.19 Intended Promotion Parliament.

  • 3 In special cases, the college may grant access to promotions to persons who comply with paragraph 2 (b) and (c) but do not comply with that paragraph (a).

  • 4 For each promotion, the college for promotions points to a professor from a university, a philosophical university or the Open University as a promoter. The promotion shall take place before this College or by a committee, by putting the college together of professors and other persons in respect of whom it has held that they have sufficient qualifications to be held in committee. sitting, taking into account the Article 7.19 Intended Promotion Parliament.

  • 5 For the purposes of the fourth paragraph, the special professors of a public university shall be regarded as university professors.

  • 6 An institution may together with one or more Dutch or foreign institutions grant the degree Doctor on the basis of a promotion. The first to fifth members shall apply mutatis mutandis. The institutions may make further arrangements for the implementation within the framework of the Promotion Parliament.


Article 7.19. Promogovernlement; honorary doctorate

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Taking into account the provisions of this Law, the College of Promotion shall adopt the Promotion Parliament. That Regulation shall regulate:

    • (a) the proceedings relating to the preparation of the promotion and the promotion itself, including the task and powers of each person involved in the promotion or for the promotion of the promotion,

    • b. the provisions governing the settlement of disputes which may arise in relation to the preparation of the promotion and the promotion itself; and

    • c. if applicable, the course of action with respect to Article 7.18, sixth paragraph .

  • 2 The college of promotions is empowered, on a proposal of the institution board, to grant the degree Doctor honoris causa to natural persons for very outstanding merits.


Paragraph 4. Grades and titanium

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.19a. Degree Bachelor, Master and Associate degree

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The person to whom on the grounds of Article 7.10a a degree has been granted, it shall be entitled to express that degree in its own name, if it so wishes, supplemented by the entry provided for in Article 7.10a, paragraph 4.

  • 4 The person to whom on the grounds of Article 7.10b the degree Associate degree has been granted, is entitled to express that degree in its own name statement. The abbreviation of that degree is Ad.

  • 5 The degree and the addition shall be placed, abbreviated, in the name of the name in the name of the name, supplemented, if appropriate, by the words in the name of the name of the name: Article 7.10a, fourth paragraph .


Article 7.20. Titles ir., mr., drs., ing. and bc.

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Person on the grounds of Article 7.19a is entitled to express a degree in scientific education in its own name notice, is also entitled to conduct:

    • a. the title of engineer, abbreviated to ir., if it is a master ' s degree in scientific education in the fields of agriculture and natural environment or in the field of engineering,

    • b. the title master, abbreviated to mr., if it is a master ' s degree in scientific education in the field of law, or

    • c. the title of PhD thesis, abbreviated to drs., if it is a master ' s degree in scientific education to which parts a and b do not apply.

  • 2 The person on the grounds of Article 7.19a is entitled to express a degree in higher vocational education in its own name, it shall also be entitled to conduct:

    • a. the title of engineer, abbreviated to ing., if it is a bachelor of education in higher vocational education in the fields of agriculture and natural environment or in the field of technology; or

    • b. the title of baccalaureus, which is abbreviated to bc., if it is a bachelor of vocational training in higher vocational education, to which part (a) does not apply.

  • 3 The titles referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be placed in the name of the title.

  • 4 The first paragraph shall not apply to masters ' training referred to in Article 7.3b.

  • 5 The person concerned shall make a choice of expression in the name of a degree as specified in the name of Article 7.10a and the conduct of a title as referred to in this Article.


Article 7.20a. The title kand. [ Expired per 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.21. Titles Master and Bachelor [ Expandable by 01-09-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.22. Degree of Doctor

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The person to whom on the basis of the promotion, intended in Article 7.18 , or as a result of Article 7.19, second paragraph , the degree Doctor has been granted, is entitled to express that degree in its own name statement.

  • 2 The person entitled to express the degree referred to in that paragraph in its own name under the first paragraph shall also be entitled to have the title of doctor.

  • 3 The degree referred to in paragraph 1 shall be placed, referred to as D, in the name of the name in the name of the name. The title referred to in paragraph 2 shall be placed on the name of the name of the following.

  • 4 The person concerned shall make a choice of expression in the name's own name of the degree referred to in paragraph 1 and the conduct of the title referred to in the second paragraph.


Article 7.22a. Maintaining titles old style

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Those who are on the grounds of the Articles 7.20 and 7.22 , as provided for in those provisions by 31 August 2002, are entitled to pursue a title referred to in the relevant provisions, remain entitled to pursue that title in accordance with those Articles.

  • 2 Those who are on the grounds of Article 7.21 , as that provision on 31 August 2002 ushered, entitled to be entitled to the title Master's title or the title Bachelor, remain entitled to pursue that title in accordance with that Article.


Article 7.23. Degrees and titles obtained outside the Netherlands

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The person to whom, on the basis of an examination, a degree of higher education not established in the Netherlands has been granted a degree and who is entitled to express that degree in the country concerned in the name of the same name shall be the one to whom the also have the right to express that degree in the Netherlands in the same manner as in the country in question.

  • 2 The person to whom a degree of qualification has been awarded to a higher education institution not established in the Netherlands under a ministerial procedure and who is entitled to that degree in the country concerned in the name of a given name. expression, is also entitled to be one of the titles of the title in the Netherlands, Article 7.20 -To have it. The rules referred to in the first sentence shall also specify the cases to which the expression of the degree may be expressed in its name.

  • 3 Our Minister may authorise the person to whom, on the basis of an examination of a higher education institution not established in the Netherlands, a degree has not been granted, which is not included in the ministerial arrangement referred to in the second paragraph, to the place of of that degree in its own name to express in the Netherlands one of the titles, mentioned in Article 7.20 , if the training under which the other degree was granted, in the opinion of our Minister, is at least equivalent to a corresponding Dutch training course.

  • 4 The person to whom a higher education institution, who is not established in the Netherlands, has a degree as specified in Article 7.22 is entitled to express a degree in the country concerned in its own name, is also entitled to express that degree in the Netherlands in its own name as a reference to that degree. the same way as in the country concerned. The third paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • For the purposes of this Article, 'the provision of a degree' shall include the acquisition of a title.


Title 2. Preliminary training requirements and requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. Pretraining requirements for undergraduate training.

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.23a. Starting point clause 1

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

For the purposes of this paragraph, "training" means a bachelor's degree.


Article 7.24. Pre-training requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 3 For enrolation for an education or for an education unit, belonging to an education, to the Open University do not apply pretraining requirements, unless it is a joint training as intended in Article 7.3c . If no pre-training requirements apply, the entry for an education or training unit shall be open to any person who has reached the age of 18 years.

  • 4 For the registration of a basic teaching training course, special detailed training requirements may be required as set out in the Articles 7.25a and 7.25b .


Article 7.25. Further advance training requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 In the case of ministerial arrangements, boxes and other parts of the programmes which must have taken part in the examination to obtain a diploma referred to in the first paragraph in order to be registered for a given period may also be drawn up. training or training group designated under that ministerial arrangement, where the training or group of training is:

    • a. A diploma relating to a profile whose profile part does not include the same subjects and other programme components for all candidates;

    • b. a diploma which relates to a profile other than a profile designated under the first paragraph;

    • c. in special cases, an education which does not allow any profile to be prepared without any further good preparation.

  • 5 The institution of the institution may provide that the holder of a diploma, named in the first or third member who does not meet the conditions laid down in the first, second or third paragraph, is to be registered under the condition that it is clear from the following: In terms of their content, the corresponding requirements are met. These requirements must be met before training starts, subject to the possibility that training courses may be designated by ministerial arrangement for which, in cases to be determined by the institution of the institution and in the form of the institution's administration conditions to be determined, the requirements may be fulfilled at the latest by the completion of the propedeutic phase or, if this phase is not established, the first period in that training with a study of 60 credits. The requirements are included in the education and examination arrangements.


Article 7.25a. Special detailed training requirements training as primary school teacher

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the case of basic teaching training, special conditions for training may be required by, or under general management, as a condition of registration until such training is provided. Where execution is given to the first sentence, Article 7.25, second and third paragraphs , not applicable to primary school teacher training.

  • 2 The special additional training requirements referred to in paragraph 1 refer to parts or areas of knowledge as referred to in the first paragraph. Article 9, first and second paragraphs, of the Law on Primary Education On the basis of those requirements, the prospective student for the registration in the course of training to primary school teacher shows that there is sufficient knowledge to be able to participate in that training.

  • 3 In the case of or under the general measure of management referred to in paragraph 1, it may be determined by which boxes which have taken part in the examination to obtain a diploma as referred to in paragraph 1 may be determined by the Article 7.24 The knowledge referred to in the second paragraph may be demonstrated. In the case of, or pursuant to that general measure of management, the level of knowledge that is different from the level of the examination referred to in the first sentence is determined.


Article 7.25b. Review special detailed training requirements training as primary school teacher

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The prospective student, intended in Article 7.25a, second paragraph , may demonstrate knowledge of the knowledge referred to in that Article by means of:

    • a. The presentation of a diploma as referred to in Article 7.24 , and in respect of subjects which have taken part in the examination to obtain that diploma, the numerical list or the results of the results of the diploma, showing that he has the relevant knowledge, or

    • (b) where appropriate, whether or not in addition to the submission of a diploma as referred to in subparagraph (a), the production of one or more certificates as referred to in Article 7.4.11, fifth paragraph, of the Education and Vocational Education Act It appears that he has the relevant knowledge.

  • 2 If the prospective student fails to comply with the first member, he may show about the knowledge, intended in Article 7.25a , to dispose of it by means of a test.

  • 3 The setting board shall give the prospective student the opportunity to issue a test and shall lay down rules of procedural nature in relation to the test.


Article 7.26. Additional requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If the exercise of the profession or the professions on which an education prepares, or the organization and furniles of education, makes specific requirements regarding knowledge or skills that are not or not to sufficient degree are of secondary education, intended for the purpose of Law on secondary education and in the Secondary Education Act BES , or vocational education, as specified in the Law on education and vocational education Where specific requirements are laid down as regards the characteristics of the student, training courses may be designated by ministerial arrangements which may, on the basis of the grounds set out in this Article, be set out in addition to the requirements set out in the Annex. Article 7.24 . The setting board shall establish a scheme for the selection criteria and procedures. The selection criteria may only include requirements directly related to the grounds, intended in the first sentence. This paragraph shall not apply to training in the field of art and teacher training in the field of art.

  • 2 In the case of the ministerial arrangement referred to in paragraph 1, rules of procedure may also be laid down.


Article 7.26a. Additional requirements for training and teacher training in the field of art

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By ministerial arrangement, training courses in the field of arts and teacher training courses may be designated in connection with the organization and furning of education or knowledge or skills of the teaching profession. prospective students and extraneis can set specific requirements in addition to the requirements, intended in Article 7.24 . For the registration of such training courses, the requirement for possession of a certificate of admission as referred to in paragraph 4 shall be deemed to be required.

  • 2 With regard to the training courses to which the first paragraph applies, the setting-board of the specific requirements for training referred to in paragraph 1 shall lay down criteria for the selection and admission of students; and extraneï. The selection criteria may only include requirements directly related to the grounds, referred to in the first sentence of the first paragraph.

  • 3 For each training, the institution management shall set up a committee responsible for examining whether prospective students or extraniles comply with the requirements referred to in paragraph 1 and the criteria referred to in paragraph 2. The Commission shall deliver a reasoned opinion to the institution's board.

  • 4 The setting board shall decide whether it fulfils the requirements referred to in paragraph 1 and with the criteria referred to in paragraph 2 in respect of each student or extraneus prospective student. The institution's administration shall notify the student or extraneus of the outcome of the investigation in question and shall, if the result of the investigation so provides, provide evidence of admission to that student.

  • 5 In the case of the ministerial arrangement referred to in paragraph 1, rules of procedural nature may also be laid down.


Article 7.27. Job requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The setting board may, for the purpose of registering for part-time training in a university or at a college of colleges, require that the work be carried out during the course of the course of the course of the course of the training course, if the person concerned is (i) work in the education and examination scheme has been identified as teaching units.


Article 7.28. Exemption granted under other diplomas

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The person to whom a degree as referred to in Article 7.10a has been granted, is exempt from the in Article 7.24 Without prejudice to the third and fourth paragraphs, the second subparagraph shall be subject to the pretraining requirements referred to in the second paragraph. The pre-training requirements referred to in the first sentence shall also be exempt from those who have access to scientific education or higher vocational education in the country of a contracting party which is the Convention on the Recognition of Qualifications of the European Union. qualifications for higher education in the European region (Trb. (137) ratified, without prejudice to the competence of the institution's authority to show a significant difference between the general requirements of access to the territory of the Treaty under Article IV.1 of the said Treaty. the country in which the qualification was obtained and the general requirements of or under this Act. Equality of competence consists of the third and fourth sentences of the second paragraph, third and fourth sentences, and the fourth sentence of Article 3 (1) and (4). Articles 7.26 , 7.26a and 7.27 .

  • 1a The setting board may, with a view to the registration of a bachelor's training at a university of the holder of a certificate of a successful propedeutic examination of a higher education institution which is not in the the possession of a diploma as specified in Article 7.24, first paragraph In the opinion of the second paragraph of a ministerial arrangement, or at least equivalent, to the judgement of the institution of the institution concerned at least equivalent to requiring evidence of knowledge, knowledge and knowledge, to have skills in order to complete the referred training course with good results.

  • 2 The setting board shall grant an exemption from the Article 7.24, first sub-member of the second paragraph , prior to the holder of a diploma, whether or not issued in the Netherlands, that has been designated by ministerial arrangement at least equivalent to the diploma referred to in the relevant paragraph, without prejudice to the third and fourth diplomas awarded in the case of a diploma which has been awarded by a ministerial order or Member. The institution board may grant exemption from the pre-training requirements referred to in Article 7.24, first subparagraph, second paragraph, to the holder of a diploma, whether or not awarded in the Netherlands, which is not in the first sentence of the first sentence. In the opinion of the institution board, the ministerial arrangement shall be incorporated, without prejudice to the third and fourth paragraphs, in the opinion of the institution of the institution at least equivalent to the diploma provided for in Article 7.24, first of the second paragraph of Article 7.24. In the case of a diploma awarded outside the Netherlands, the institution's authority may provide that no examinations or parts thereof shall be taken than after the relevant examination board has been satisfied that sufficient proof has been provided to the relevant institution. mastery of the Dutch language for being able to follow the education of the education. The setting board may also provide that the person concerned shall not be registered as long as the proof referred to in the preceding sentence has not been furnished.

  • 3 If, under ministerial arrangement, requirements as referred to in Article 7.25, first or second paragraph , having been established, the holder of a diploma referred to in the first to second members shall not be able to pass examinations before he has been shown in a manner determined by the institution of the institution on the basis of an additional study. on the knowledge and skills to which the requirements referred to in Article 7.25 apply.

  • 4 The institution's authority may provide that the holder of a diploma referred to in the first or second paragraphs cannot be registered if that administration considers that the requirements of the diploma in question are: Article 7.25 , are of such a nature that it is reasonable to expect that, during the first year of registration for training, on the basis of an additional study referred to in paragraph 3, the person concerned has knowledge of the knowledge of the and skills to which those requirements relate. The setting board shall determine the manner in which the person concerned may be exempted from such requirements on the basis of an additional examination for the purpose of the registration.

  • 5 The rules to be drawn up in respect of two to four shall be included in the system of education and examination.


Article 7.29. Exemption based on admission testing

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board can accommodate persons of twenty-one years and older who do not comply with Article 7.24, first sub-member of the second paragraph , neither of the above mentioned pre-training nor under the conditions of Article 7.28 shall be exempt from that pretraining requirement if they have demonstrated their suitability for the relevant education and sufficient control of the relevant education in the course of an investigation by a committee to be set up by the institution's authority; Dutch language for being able to follow that education with fruit.

  • 2 The requirements of the examination shall be included in the education and examination arrangements.

  • 3 The institution of the institution may derogate from the age limit referred to in paragraph 1 with respect to a holder of a diploma awarded in the country of a diploma from outside the Netherlands which provides for access to an institution of higher education in his own country. Of that age limit, the institution's management may also deviate, if no diploma can be submitted in special cases.

  • 4 The institution's board may deviate from the age mentioned in paragraph 1 in special cases with regard to training in the field of art.


Article 7.30. Postpropedeutic phase

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the registration of a training after the examination of the propedeutic examination, the requirement to hold a certificate of the propedeutic examination of that course or of the propedeutic exam carried out with good results shall be required to require the certificate to be awarded on the basis of a certificate issued by the person responsible for the examination of that course. have training and one or more other training in common.

  • 2 The institution board may grant an exemption from the requirement referred to in paragraph 1 to the holder of a diploma, whether or not issued in the Netherlands, if that diploma in the judgement of the institution is at least equivalent to that of the institution; the certificate referred to in the first paragraph. In the case of a diploma awarded outside the Netherlands, the institution of the institution may provide that no examinations or parts thereof shall be taken than after the proof of sufficient proof has been provided to the relevant examination board. mastery of the Dutch language for being able to follow the education of the education.

  • 3 Having regard to the provisions of the rules of education and examination, the examination board may, by way of derogation from the first paragraph, be able to access one or more parts of the procedure to the person who has been registered, at its request. to grant a final examination before having passed the propedeutic examination of the relevant training.


Paragraph 2. Master training related requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.30a. Admission requirements connecting master training courses in science education [ Expired by 01-09-2014]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.30b. Master training admission requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the registration of a master 's degree in scientific education or for a master' s degree in higher vocational education, it is considered as an admission requirement:

    • a. The possession of a Bachelor degree in the academic education of a Bachelor degree in higher vocational education; or

    • b. the possession of knowledge, insight and skills at the level of a degree Bachelor in the academic education of a degree Bachelor in higher vocational education.

  • 2 The setting board may, in addition to the requirements referred to in the first paragraph, lay down qualitative admission requirements. These requirements are included in the education and examination arrangements.

  • 3 The institution board shall allow those who meet the requirements to be in a Masters degree. If the setting board has set a maximum number of persons to be charged for training, the additional admission requirement shall be that this number shall not be exceeded by the authorisation.

  • 4 The setting board shall, in good time, publish the procedure on the basis of which admission is to take place in case the number of prospective students for a master degree would exceed the maximum number referred to in the third paragraph. For this purpose, the institution management shall adopt a regulation.

  • 5 If there are qualitative admission requirements of students, the number of species shall be at least two.

  • 6 If graduates of a bachelor 's degree in science education cannot or threaten to enroll in a master' s degree in scientific education, Our Minister can provide one or more setup of Require universities to designate one or more Master ' s training courses to which the said graduates can register.


Article 7.30c. Admission requirements for master training in education in the field of education; exemption from this

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the registration of a master ' s degree in scientific education as a teacher for the period of preparatory higher education, apply as admission requirements that:

    • a. to the person concerned the degree Master, intended in Article 7.10a , has been granted, and

    • (b) the person concerned complies with the requirements to be made by the institution.

  • 2 The institution board may grant an exemption from the admission requirement referred to in paragraph 1 (a) if it is established by a study which it has established that the person concerned has comparable knowledge, knowledge and skills to which he/she is Admission requirement is related.


Article 7.30d. Admission requirements do not apply due to Lisbon commitments

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

To the persons referred to in Article 7.28, first paragraph, second sentence , without prejudice to the competence of the institution of the institution, under Article IV.1 of the Treaty on the Recognition of Higher Education Qualifications in the European Region (Trb). (137) to demonstrate a significant difference between the general requirements of access in the territory of the country in which the qualification was obtained and the general requirements of, or under this law, not applicable:

  • a. Article 7.30b , with the exception of the requirements referred to in the second paragraph, and

  • b. Article 7.30c , with the exception of the knowledge, understanding and skills referred to in the second paragraph.


Article 7.30e. Failure to comply with admission requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

If the person concerned does not comply with the requirements of the authorisation, Articles 7.30b or 7.30c And he can reasonably be expected to be able to meet it within a reasonable period of time, to give him the opportunity to take away the shortcoming and to meet the requirements of the authorisation.


Article 7.31. Publication procedure; procedural rules [ Expestablished by 01-09-2014]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

TITLE 2A. EXEMPTION FROM EXAMINATION OF EXAMINATIONS MADE ON THE BASIS OF THE POSSESSION OF A DIPLOMA OF VOCATIONAL EDUCATION [ Expandsof 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 3. Students and Extraneï

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. Notification, study and study activities and study advice

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.31a. Notification no later than 1 May

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By 1 May preceding the year of study in question, the person who wishes to register as a student for a given propedeutic phase of a bachelor ' s degree course shall report to a particular institution or, if that phase is not set up, the first period in a bachelor's degree with a student of 60 credits, to join our minister, with due regard to Article 7.31d and in accordance with rules of a procedural nature to be determined by Ministerial Regulation.

  • 2 The notification shall be indicated by the institution in which and the bachelor's training for which the person concerned wishes to register.

  • 3 If the person concerned wishes to register for more than one bachelor's degree prior to the year of study in question, the obligation of the person concerned, referred to in the first paragraph, shall be for one bachelor's training.

  • 4 Our Minister delivers the notification data referred to in this article and the Articles 7.31c and 7.31d , to the institution or institutions for which the person concerned has registered.

  • This article does not apply to a student who, after 1 May, is to sign up to a bachelor ' s degree other than the one in which he was originally registered but can prove that the new notification is the result of a termination of the Registration on the basis of Article 7.8b, fifth paragraph , at a time when he was unable to sign up before 1 May, prior to the year of study for which he wishes to register.


Article 7.31b. Rights and obligations for notification no later than 1 May

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If the person concerned has signed up to one or more undergraduate training courses by 1 May at the latest, in accordance with the rules in question, Article 7.31a, first paragraph , he has the right to participate in studio activities to be organized by the institution in respect of the relevant bachelor training courses. The institution's board may decide that the person concerned is obliged to participate in the study activities.

  • 2 The institution's management of the institution shall deliver a study opinion on each student who has subscribed to and who has participated in the study activities. A maximum number of study opinions on which the person concerned is entitled may be determined by ministerial arrangement.

  • 3 If application is given to the second sentence of the first paragraph and the person concerned does not participate in the study activities, referred to in that paragraph without a valid reason, the institution may decide to register the person concerned with the application of the decision. refuse.

  • 4 The setting board shall lay down detailed rules for the implementation of this Article which shall, in any event, relate to the nature and content of the study activities for the institution or per training, the time limit within which the institution of the institution is responsible for the activities of the institutions. study activities are taking place, the period within which and the way in which the study advice is delivered, the consequences of not taking part in study activities and the valid reasons for the absence of a valid reason for preventing them from taking part. Inability to participate in those activities. When laying down the detailed rules, the setting board for prospective students comes from the public bodies of Bonaire, Sint Eustatius and Saba, Aruba, Curaçao and Sint Maarten to such facilities as to enable them to participate in the study programme activities without their physical presence on the institution being required.

  • 5 This Article shall not apply to:

    • a. The enrolment for a bachelor's training for which a selection procedure is established; and

    • b. Those on the basis of Article 7.28 because of possession of a diploma obtained outside the Netherlands is exempt from the diploma requirements, intended in the Articles 7.24, first and second paragraphs .


Article 7.31c. Notification after 1 May for another bachelor ' s degree

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If the person has complied with the obligation, Article 7.31a, first paragraph , associated with that other bachelor's training and after 1 May for a bachelor degree other than the bachelor's training, referred to in the said provision, the institution board may decide that the person concerned is obliged to participate in the training course. study activities, intended to be carried out in Article 7.31b, first paragraph .


Article 7.31d. Notification after 1 May for the first time

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If the person concerned has not complied with the obligation, Article 7.31a, first paragraph , and sign up for a bachelor ' s degree after 1 May, the institution board may decide that:

    • (a) he/she refuses to register for the relevant bachelor degree, or

    • (b) the person concerned is obliged to participate in the study activities, intended to be carried out in accordance with Article 7.31b, first paragraph .

  • 2 With regard to the first paragraph, introductory wording and part b, Article 7.31b, second paragraph , applicable. If the institution board has issued a negative study opinion, he may decide that he shall refuse to register for the relevant bachelor of charge training. Article 7.31b, third, fourth and fifth paragraph, shall apply mutatis mutandis in respect of this Article.


Article 7.31e. Person number to be given on notification

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the purpose of the notification provided for in this paragraph, the person concerned shall communicate his person's number. If the student makes it possible that he cannot produce a person's number, the notification shall take place in accordance with the third paragraph.

  • 2 The personal number shall be provided by means of a document issued by a public authority, including details of the generic name, the initials, the date of birth, and the sex of the person concerned.

  • 3 If the person concerned is likely to show that he cannot produce a person's number, our Minister shall, within eight weeks of the receipt of the notification to him, provide him with his teaching number. The teaching number is a personal number issued by Our Minister and assigned to the person concerned.

  • 4 Our Minister, within eight weeks of the receipt of the notification to the institution of the institution of the institution to which the person concerned wishes to register, the person's number of persons and the particulars, as referred to in Article 4 (1), Article 7.52, second paragraph , to the extent that they have been provided by the person concerned.


Article 7.31f. Sign-up at Open University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Articles 7.31a to 7.31d do not apply to the Open University.


Paragraph 1a. Enrollment

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.32. General provision

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Each one who wishes to be able to make use of educational facilities, examination facilities or other services of other kind for the purpose of initial education to an institution, must act as a student or extraneous by the institution of the institution. enrolling.

  • 2 By way of derogation from the first paragraph, registration for dual training or at the Open University shall be possible only as a student.

  • 3 The registration shall be made for a training, except that the registration at the Open University shall be made for one or more educational units. A student who wants to follow an Ad program, he writes in for the training and the Ad program.

  • The subscription for training shall be carried out for the whole year of study. If the tender takes place during the course of the year of study, it shall be valid for the remainder of the year of study.

  • 5 The registration as a student or extraneus is only open to the person whose parents, guardians or caregivers demonstrate, or, if he is majority and capable of action, the person who proves that he:

    • a. Dutch nationality is treated as a Dutchman on the basis of a legal provision;

    • b. is a foreigner and is less than 18 years of age on the first day of the training for which registration is required for the first time;

    • c. is a foreigner, 18 years of age or older, on the first day of the first day of the training for which registration is required for the first time and holds legitimate residence on that day in the sense of Article 8 of the Aliens Act 2000 ,

    • d. is a foreigner and is resident outside the Netherlands on the first day of the course of the training for which registration is required for the first time; or

    • e. stranger is, no longer meets any of the conditions mentioned under b, c or d, and previously in agreement with one of those parts is registered for an institution training, which training is still being followed and not yet is complete.

  • 6 If, after the registration, it appears that it has not taken place on any grounds in accordance with the fifth paragraph, the registration of the student or extraneus shall be terminated immediately.


Article 7.33. Enrollment procedure

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Without prejudice Article 7.39 The tendering procedure shall be governed by rules of a procedural nature to be determined by the institution.

  • 2 To the person who is registered, the institution shall issue a certificate of registration specifying his rights.

  • 3 In the case of or under general management measures, rules may be laid down concerning the rules referred to in paragraph 1.


Article 7.34. Enrollment fee as a student

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The registration as a student gives the right:

    • a. to participate in the initial education of the institution, subject to the jurisdiction of the institution of a university, college or philosophical university in the event of application of the institution; Articles 6.7a , 7.9, 1st Member , 7.30a, third member , 7.30b, 1st Member , 7.42a , 7.53, 3rd Member , 7.56 or 7.57h otherwise decide,

    • b. to take the examinations of the educational units of the training, and to complete the examinations of those training courses;

    • (c) of access to establishments and collections of the institution, unless, in the opinion of the institution board, the nature or importance of teaching or research is opposed,

    • d. to make use of other facilities that have been affected to the students, including, except as far as the Open University is concerned, the services of a student dean; and

    • e. by means of guidance; the institution administration shall devote particular care to the guidance of students belonging to an ethnic or cultural minority whose participation in higher education is a significant achievement in the context of the participation of Dutch people who do not belong to such a minority.

  • 2 If the setting-board terminates an education, that Board shall determine the time at which such decision becomes effective so that the students enrolled in the course of training shall be trained on the same or another institution within a Complete reasonable time.

  • 3 The institution of the Open University shall lay down rules on students resident outside the Netherlands with regard to the rights referred to in paragraph 1 (a) to (d).


Article 7.35. Registration of duties as auditor [ Expired on 01-09-1996]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.36. Registration fees as extraneus

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The invitation to tender as extraneus only gives the rights, stated in Article 7.34, first paragraph b and c . Article 7.34, fourth paragraph , shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 7.37. Enrollment conditions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The invitation to tender shall be open to the person who meets the requirements of Title 2 requirements of this Chapter, without prejudice to: Article 7.8b, fifth paragraph , and the Articles 7.31a to 7.31d , except that the registration is open as extraneus only if, in the opinion of the institution board, the nature or importance of education is not opposed.

  • 2 To tender shall not exceed after submission of proof that the tuition fee due is or is paid, the exam fee payable is either fulfilled or, in case of entry to the Open University, it is due. Tuition fee OU is or is being met.

  • 3 If a majority student or extraneus does not meet the tuition fee, exam fee or course fee itself, registration shall not take place than after the student or extraneus has been certified in writing that he agrees to enter a that statement quoted third party on his behalf meets tuition fees, exam fees or course fees.

  • 4 The management of a particular institution may indicate that those who wish to be registered shall be deemed to respect the institution and objectives of the institution. The registration may be refused or withdrawn if the person concerned does not respect the institution and objectives of the institution. The refusal or revocation of the invitation to tender shall be made in writing and shall state the reasons on which it is based.

  • 5 The registration of a special institution may be refused or withdrawn if there are grounds for serious concern that the person concerned may abuse the registration and the rights attaching thereto by a serious prejudice to the registration of the person concerned. its own nature, or it has been found to have taken such an abuse by the person concerned and the rights attached thereto. Refusal or revocation of the invitation to tender shall be made in writing and shall state the reasons on which it is based.

  • 6 The registration may not be withdrawn under paragraph 5 if the person concerned does not have an opportunity to attend the course of training in another institution.


Article 7.37a. Derogation for registration in the 2005-2006 academic year and the following years of study

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

By way of derogation from Article 7.37, first paragraph , is the registration for an education designated on the basis of Article 6 or Article 8 of the Experiment Act pre-training requirements, selection and tuition fee, also open to the person meeting the requirements of those Articles.


Article 7.37b. Additional condition for registration in the study year 2005-2006 and subsequent years

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

By way of derogation from Article 7.37, first paragraph , is the registration for an education designated on the basis of Article 7 of the Experiments Act for training requirements, selection and tuition fee , where appropriate, in connection with participating in an experimental programme, only open to the person who also complies with the that Article Those requirements.


Article 7.38. Person number to be given in case of notification [ Expired by 01-09-2013]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.39. Person-specific number to be provided by tender

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At the time of registration, the student or extraneus shall also submit his person's number. If the student or extraneus shows that he is unable to produce a person's number, the registration shall take place in accordance with the second paragraph. Article 7.31d, second paragraph , is applicable.

  • 2 If the student or extraneus suggests that he cannot produce a person's number, the setting board shall, within a period of two weeks, inform our Minister of the available information of the student or extraneus as referred to in the first paragraph; and his address and address of residence.

  • 3 Our Secretary of State shall, within eight weeks of receipt of the notification referred to in the second paragraph, provide the institution's civil service number or extraneus, or, if it has been found that he is not of the public authority, Civil service number is provided, student number of student or extraneus.

  • 4 The institution board shall record the person's number of students or extraneus in the administration of the institution.

  • 5 If a student or extraneus is assigned a teaching number and the institution is then given the institution of the institution on its civil service number, the institution shall immediately enter this civil service number as a person-bound number in the administration of the institution to the place of the teaching number. The institution board shall report this amendment to our Minister within two weeks, including the citizen's service number and the student's teaching number or extraneus.


Article 7.40. Bid duration used calculation [ Expired on 01-09-1996]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.41. Duration of the tendering procedure, Article 7.4, fourth paragraph, first and third sentences, and fifth paragraph, first and third sentences [ Expandes per 01-09-1996]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.42. Enrollment Termination

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall terminate at the request of the person who is registered for a training his registration with effect from the following month.

  • 2 If the person who is registered for an education has not fulfilled his statutory tuition fee, institution fee, tuition fee OU or examination fee after notice, the institution may enter the tender, starting from the second month following the second month of application. to terminate the notice.

  • 4 The institution of the institution shall lay down rules of procedure as to the application of this Article.

  • 5 The setting board shall inform the party concerned and Our Minister about the termination of the registration.


Article 7.42a. Student's behaviour in relation to future occupation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board may in special cases after opinion of the examination board, the dean or any organ similar to the dean within the institution and after careful consideration of the interests involved, the registration of a student for a If that student has demonstrated his incapacity for the performance of one or more occupations to which he or she leads, or for the practical purposes of his or her actions, by his or her conduct or as a result of his or her conduct, or preparation for the professional exercise.

  • 2 The institution board or the institution board of another institution providing the same or related training may decide not to enter the student again or not for that training.

  • 3 If the student as referred to in the first paragraph is registered for another education and follows education from a graduate course corresponding to or having regard to practical preparation for the occupation of the profession, training for which registration has been terminated by application of the first paragraph, the institution board may, following the opinion of the examination board, the dean or a body similar to the Dean of the Dean of the Council and after a careful consideration of the interests involved decide that the student is taking that graduation direction or other parts of that training should not be carried out.


Section 2. Own contributions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.43. Tuition Fee Obligation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A student is for each study year enrolled by the institution board for an education, to the relevant institution statutory tuition fee as intended. Articles 7.45 and 7.45a Or set-of-entry fee as referred to in Article 7.46 due. A student enrolled by the institution board of the Open University for an education unit is tuition fee OU, intended to be used. Article 7.45b That's due.


Article 7.44. Examination Obligation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 An extraneus shall be due for examination of the relevant institution for each year of study entered by the institution responsible for training.

  • 2 The setting board shall determine the amount of the examination fee.


Article 7.45. Rate of statutory tuition fees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The amount of full statutory tuition fees shall be determined by general management measure.

  • 2 The amount of partial statutory tuition fees is determined by the setting board and is located between a minimum and a maximum amount. These amounts shall be determined by or pursuant to general measures of management.

  • 3 The partial statutory tuition fee is no more than the full statutory tuition fee.

  • 4 The institution board shall inform our Minister about the amount determined by the institution board on the basis of the second paragraph.

  • 5 The amounts determined by or pursuant to general provisions of management referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be indexed each year in accordance with the Consumer Price Index, in accordance with the rules applicable to or under the general measure of management.


Article 7.45a. Entitlement to statutory tuition fees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The statutory tuition fee is payable by a student who:

    • a. According to the basic register of education, since 1 September 1991, a bachelor's degree has not previously been awarded or registered for a master degree by a master degree, and has not previously obtained a master degree; and

    • b. to one of the groups of persons referred to in Article 2.2 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 , belongs to or holds Surinamese nationality.

  • 2 The condition referred to in paragraph 1 (a) shall not apply to a student who is training for the first time in the field of education or health care.

  • 3 In the case of a general measure of management, the category of students referred to in the first paragraph may be extended.

  • 4 A student as referred to in the first, second or third member, who is registered for a full-time course of training is the full statutory tuition fee, intended in Article 7.45, first paragraph That's due.

  • 5 A student as referred to in the first, second or third member, who is enrolled for part-time or dual education, is the partial statutory tuition fee, intended in Article 7.45, second paragraph That's due.

  • 6 If a student as referred to in the first, second or third member follows more than one training and the training for which he is first enrolled is due to due course, this student owes the statutory tuition fee for the remaining education. part of the study year. In such cases, the amount due shall be calculated in proportion to the number of remaining months of the year of study in question.

  • 7 For the condition referred to in paragraph 1 (a), a student who obtained a bachelor's degree shall be treated as:

    • a. A student who has passed the final examination of a higher vocational training course with a student of 168 credits, according to the law as of 31 August 2002; and

    • b. A student who has passed the candidate exam with good consequence from an education in scientific education as intended in Article 7.8 , as that article ushered on 31 August 2002.

  • 8 For the condition referred to in paragraph 1 (a), a student who has obtained a bachelor 'or master' degree shall be treated as:

    • a. A student who, with good consequence, has passed the final examination of an education in scientific education as intended in Article 7.3 , as that article was published on 31 August 2002;

    • b. A student who is based on Article 18.14 has passed the final examination of training in scientific education, with good consequence; and

    • c. a student who is based on Article 18.15 has passed the final examination of a training in scientific education.


Article 7.45b. Tuition fee OU

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 3 The height of the tuition fee OU is determined by the setting board of the Open University. For the category of students, referred to in the second paragraph, the institution of the Open University can establish different tuition fees by educational unit or group of educational units or groups of students or groups of students.

  • 4 If, during a year of study, a student as referred to in the second paragraph fulfils the conditions laid down in the Article 7.45a, first, second or third members , he owes for the remaining part of the study year at his request the tuition fee OU, referred to in the first member, and pays the institution board OU him the higher tuition fee OU, which the student has for the remainder of the study year. Paid, back.

  • 5 The institution board of the Open University sets out rules relating to the application of this Article.


Article 7.46. Institution column money

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The amount of the institution's fee shall be determined by the institution's management. The institution board may set up a different set of institutions for each training or group of trainings or per group or groups of students.

  • 4 If, during a year of study, the student referred to in paragraph 1 fulfils the conditions laid down in the first paragraph, Article 7.45a, first, second, third or sixth member , he owes the statutory tuition fee for the remaining part of the year of study, and the institution board shall reimburse him the higher institution credit fee paid by the student for the remainder of the academic year.

  • 5 The setting board shall lay down rules governing the application of this Article.


Article 7.47. Satisfaction tuition fees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The tuition fee is met by or on behalf of the student by:

    • a. Payment suddenly,

    • b. payment in five instalments, at the request of the person who has committed to payment, or

    • c. payment in a different number of instalments in accordance with a payment scheme to be made by the institution of the institution and the person in charge of payment.

  • 2 Where payment is made in instalments, administration costs may be charged by the institution's administrative expenses to an amount determined by or pursuant to a general measure of management.


Article 7.48. Reduction, exemption and reimbursement of tuition fees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If a student as intended in Article 7.45a has been registered in an institution for an education and institution with the same or any other institution other than the Open University wishing to register a second registration, it shall be exempt from the payment of the aid for the purposes of the latter. tuition fees, unless the paid or payable amount for the initial tender is lower than the full statutory tuition fee, intended in Article 7.45, first paragraph . In that case, the difference is due.

  • 2 The person responsible for following up on the basis of the tuition or course fees paid by the public purse is the following: Lesson and course money law , and who, instead, wishes to be registered in the same year of study, and to do so in the course of the statutory tuition fee. Article 7.45, first paragraph , is due, for the registration of an education to a funded institution with the exception of the Open University, that a tuition fee is payable, which is the difference between the contribution already paid and the statutory tuition fees. If he owes a tuition fee that is lower than the amount already paid, he is exempt from paying tuition fees.

  • 3 A student owes only a portion of the statutory tuition fee due to him, if the student writes in during the year of study. In that case, the amount due shall be calculated in proportion to the number of remaining months of the year of study in question.

  • 4 The student is entitled to repayment of a 12th instalment of the statutory tuition fee he owed for each month that lasts after termination of his tender, unless a payment scheme as referred to in Article 7.47, part b -It's been hit. If a student dies in the course of the year of study, a twelfth part of the statutory tuition fees shall be reimbursed for each subsequent month of the year following his death. Upon termination of the invitation to tender as from July or August, the student shall not have a claim for the termination of payment of the instalments referred to in Article 7.47 (b) and for reimbursement of tuition fees paid for those months, unless the institution board has arranged it otherwise. This paragraph does not apply to the Open University.

  • 5 Reduction of, or exemption from, the statutory tuition fee in cases other than those referred to in the first to fourth paragraphs shall be deemed to be an inefficient use of the state's contribution, which is to be used in the Article 2.9, first paragraph .

  • 6 The institution board of the Open University establishes a scheme in which a provision is made in the form of tuition fee reduction OU, for students as intended. Article 7.45b, first paragraph , whose tax income is intended to be Article 8, first to fourth paragraph, of the General Act on income-dependent schemes , less than 110% of the taxable minimum wage. In the scheme, the institution board shall determine which application documents are to be submitted. The level of the reduction, referred to in the first sentence, shall in any event be dependent on the income of the person concerned.


Article 7.49. Tuition fees for certain full-time courses from the year of study 2005-2006

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The setting board shall ensure, before the start of the year of study, the disclosure of the amount determined under paragraph 1.

  • 3 If the first member has found application for a training application, tuition fees determined in accordance with the first member shall be called in the place of tuition fees. Article 7.45, first paragraph .


Article 7.50. Other contributions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The invitation to tender shall not be subject to any financial contribution other than the amount in the Articles 7.43 to 7.49 amounts referred to.

  • 2 By way of derogation from paragraph 1, a general measure of management may stipulate that the setting-board shall, for the purposes of registration, be set up for the purposes of training as referred to in the Articles 6.7 , 7.26, 1st Member , 7.26a, 1st Member , 7.53 and 7.56 may require a contribution to the costs directly related to education. The general measure of management may determine the types of costs that may be associated with such a contribution and the maximum amount that can be claimed.

  • 3 The institution of the institution shall provide financial support to those for whom the contribution referred to in the second paragraph constitutes an inexalable obstacle to the registration. The setting board shall lay down detailed rules for the application of the second paragraph and with regard to the financial support provided for in the first sentence.


Paragraph 2a. Profiling Fund

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.51. Financial support related to special circumstances

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The administration of a senior institution for higher education shall provide the financial support of a student registered with that institution who, in connection with the presence of a special circumstance, has received a study programme has contracted or is expected to rise.

  • 2 The special circumstances referred to in paragraph 1 shall be as follows:

    • a. membership of the board of a student body of any size with full jurisdiction, a training committee, the board of an education as referred to in Article 9.17 , the university council, the faculty council, the body set up under the participation scheme, meant by the university. Article 9.30, third paragraph , or 10.16a, third member , the participation council, the subcouncil or the student council,

    • b. administrative or social activities which, in the opinion of the institution's management, are in the interest of the institution or of the education that the student is pursuing,

    • c. illness or pregnancy and childbirth,

    • d. a disability or chronic disease,

    • (e) special family circumstances;

    • f. Insufficient studeable training,

    • g. other special circumstances established by the institution of the institution in which a student is in a position;

    • (h) other than those specified in parts (a) to (g) which, if a request for financial assistance based on that request would not be met by the institution, would lead to an imequity of the type.


Article 7.51a. Financial support in connection with a larger study environment

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board shall make provision for the financial support of a student who is registered to the institution concerned for an education subject to the institution's management Article 7.4a, 8th paragraph Has applied.

  • 2 The duration of the financial assistance shall be the period corresponding to the study burden which exceeds 60 credits.


Article 7.51b. Financial support related to non-regranting accreditation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution management shall make provision for the financial support of a student who is registered to the relevant institution for an education that has not been regranted so that the student is no longer entitled to (a) study financing.


Article 7.51c. Terms and conditions for financial support

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A student comes for the financial support, intended in the Articles 7.51 to 7.51b , eligible only if:

  • a. The student for the relevant training is due to be paid tuition fees; and

  • b. The student for that training claim or has a claim to the performance scholarship higher education as intended in the Law for the 2000 financial year .


Article 7.51d. Financial support related to non-compliance with nationality requirement

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The setting board may make provision for the financial support of a student who is registered to the relevant institution for an education for which he has not yet been awarded a degree, and nor to any of the groups of Persons referred to in Article 2.2 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 It belongs to neither Surinam nationality.


Article 7.51e. Financial support for non-registered students

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board may make provision for the financial support of a person not registered to the institution concerned, but who, if he is registered to an institution, would be entitled to a form of of study financing as referred to in Article 5.2 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 .

  • 2 The financial support referred to in the first paragraph

    • a. has the form of an agreement;

    • b. shall be affected only for the period of one year,

    • c. is affected only for a person who, in the judgement of the institution management, conducts activities in administrative or social matters, which are in the interest of the institution and are not commercial in nature; and

    • d. In any event, it shall contain a scheme whereby the person for whom the provision is made has access to the facilities of the institution, other than education.


Article 7.51f. Height of financial support

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The financial support provided for in the Articles 7.51 to 7.51e , is not higher than the student funding granted under the Chapter 3 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 , then, he would have enjoyed, if he would have been or would have been entitled to it.


Article 7.51g. Provision for additional support

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In addition to the facilities specified in the Articles 7.51 to 7.51e , a provision for financial support may be made, together with the financial support resulting from the provisions referred to in Articles 7.51 to 7.51e, that is higher than the financial support given by the person concerned under the conditions of employment. Of Chapter 3 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 , then, he would have enjoyed, if he would have been or would have been entitled to it. This supplement is provided under the designation: provision for additional support.


Article 7.51h. Setup rules

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board shall establish rules of procedural nature relating to the application of the Articles 7.51 to 7.51d In any case, rules on the start, duration and level of financial support are included.

  • 2 The institution board may undertake to grant financial support the obligation that the student is factually stucting.


Article 7.51i. Disclosure and administrative commitment

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution's management shall inform the student in writing of the financial support referred to in this paragraph, specifying the amount of the additional support separately. In addition, the institution board shall record the financial support provided to the student in his administration, indicating the student ' s civil service number and the amount awarded, with the height of the additional. support is given separately.


Article 7.51j. Open University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This paragraph applies mutatis mutandis to a student who is enrolled at the Open University for an education unit.


Paragraph 2b. Financial support by Our Minister

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.51k. Financial support special activities by Our Minister

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister affects the financial support of a student who is a board member of one of a legal person with full jurisdiction based political youth organization of any size or of a national organisation of any size which is engaged in activities relevant to higher education and which is engaged in effective activities.

  • 2 The conditions under which this financial assistance is made shall be laid down by ministerial arrangement.


Paragraph 3. Use of personal number

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.52. Use of person-related number by setting-board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board may use the person-bound number of a student or extraneus in the traffic with the student or extraneus on whom the number relates.

  • 2 The institution board shall provide the personal number of each student and extraneus to our Minister, together with the following particulars of the student or extraneus:

    • a. The generic name, surname, sex and date of birth of the student or extraneus and the postal code of his place of residence;

    • b. pre-training;

    • c. the enrolment form;

    • d. Training form;

    • e. training or training, in so far as the Open University is concerned with the teaching unit or educational units for which the student or extraneus is enrolled;

    • f. the training phase;

    • g. the year, the month and the day of registration;

    • h. the year, month and day of the termination of the tender and the reason for the termination of the tender;

    • i. be exempt from the payment of tuition fees on the basis of: Article 7.48, second paragraph ;

    • j. the year, month and day of the final examination of a bachelor 's degree course and, if applicable, of the final examination of a master' s degree course, an education as intended in Article 18.15 , or an Ad Program; and

    • k. the registration number of the institution.

  • 3 In the case of ministerial arrangements, details of the information referred to in the second and fifth paragraphs may be specified, and the information referred to in the second and fifth paragraphs may no longer be provided. Rules governing the timing and methods of transmission of the information referred to in paragraph 2 may also be laid down in the case of ministerial arrangements.

  • 4 The institution board may use the person-bound number of a student or extraneus, whether or not together with one or more of the data referred to in the second and fifth members, in traffic with Our Minister for the purpose of establishing the the financing of the institution.

  • 5 If the nationality data, including data from which indicates whether the student is on the basis of Article 2.2 of the Law for the Study of Study 2000 be assimilated to a Dutchman, are not included in the municipal basic administration persons, these data shall be provided by the institution board to our Minister.

  • 6 The setting board shall use the person-bound number of a student or extraneus in traffic with another institution or an institution for other education for the purposes of the entry and registration of that student or extraneus.

  • 7 The institution of the institution shall use the person's personal number of a student in training in the context of the implementation of grant schemes of the European Social Fund.


Article 7.52a. Processing of data by our Minister

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The institution board shall provide our Minister with all the information he considers necessary for the performance of the task referred to in the first paragraph. The institution board shall work to ensure that the data contained in the basic register of education are correct and complete.

  • 3 If, as a result of the review, referred to in the first paragraph, our Minister has reason to believe that the institution of the institution is acting in violation or has acted with the particular by or under this Act, he may examine the inspection to set. Our Minister provides the person-related numbers and other data of students and extraneï to the inspection for the purposes of this investigation. The inspection reports the outcome of the investigation to our Minister. If the inspection finds that the institution of the institution is acting in violation or has acted with or pursuant to this law, it shall report the outcome of the investigation to our Minister, together with the relevant information for that outcome, which shall be were submitted to the inspection.

  • 4 Our Minister and provide the inspection for the execution of Article 107, fifth paragraph, of the Aliens Act 2000 no data received under the third paragraph, unless such information is necessary for the fulfilment of obligations as referred to in that law or for the verification of compliance with the legal requirements with regard to referrers within the meaning of that law.


Article 7.52b. Use data from basic register education by Minister and Inspection

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Data from the basic register education may be used by:

    • a. Our Minister to the extent that these data are necessary for the planning and financing of the institutions and the budget and policy preparation;

    • b. The inspection to the extent that these data are necessary for the exercise of supervision of higher education.

  • 2 To the extent that the institution-based institution Article 7.52 the Minister's opinion is incorrect or incomplete, our Minister may derogate for the purpose of determining the funding of this information, in which case the amended data adopted by Our Minister be included in the basic register of education, after the decision establishing the funding has become irrevocable.

  • 3 The use referred to in paragraph 1 shall apply only to data which are not retraced or retractable to individual students or extraneï, without prejudice to: Article 7.52a, third paragraph .

  • 4 The rules governing the implementation of the first and third paragraphs, at least on the content and composition of the data in question, shall be governed by ministerial rules, the way in which the data from the basic register of education are to be established. the timing of the transmission of the data and the periods to which the data relate.

  • 5 By way of derogation from the third paragraph, the Secretary of State may use the person-bound number for the purposes of establishing the fund for the purposes of establishing the fund. By way of derogation from paragraph 4, in the case of general administrative measures, any other information which may be used in the basic register of education together with the number of persons assigned to it shall be determined.


Paragraph 4. Special provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.52c. Conceptual provisions paragraph 4

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

For the purposes of this paragraph:

  • a. Training: a bachelor ' s degree course, and

  • b. propedeutic phase: the propedeutic phase or, if that phase is not set, the first period in a bachelor ' s degree course with a study load of 60 study points.


Article 7.53. Limitation on initial registration based on available educational capacity

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution may, per training, determine the number of students who may be enrolled for the first time for the propedeutic stage of the training concerned. Such determination shall be made for a year of study. Before 1 December of the calendar year preceding the year of study for which the first adoption takes place, the institution's administration shall inform our Minister. For training listed for the first time after this date in the register, which is to be found in the Article 6.13 , and the education of which will commence from the next year of study, shall be 1 April as the final date for the communication to Our Minister for the educational capacity of that training.

  • 2 If the information relating to the notification provided for in Article 7.37, fourth paragraph , it appears that the number of first notifications of students for the propedeutic phase of an education is more than the number of places established by the setting board on the basis of the first member, Our Minister does for 1 April of that Communication to the institution of the institution. The setting board informs our Minister before 1 May whether it will increase the number of places to be increased. This paragraph shall not apply to training courses referred to in the last sentence of the first paragraph.

  • If, even after applying the second paragraph to one or more institutions providing the relevant training, the number of notifications exceeds the number of places, the Minister shall establish that an authorisation limit is in force, and Paragraph 4a of this Title shall be applied.

  • 4 If the setting board is expected to have the number of enrolments for an education more than the number of places established by the institution on the basis of paragraph 1, by derogation from the procedure for the second and third paragraphs, also an admission restriction to that training, and shall then be applied Paragraph 4a of this Title, provided that the institution board which notified training for that purpose before 1 May has been notified to our Minister.

  • 5 Where a decision is taken pursuant to Article 7.56 applies to the course of training, this article shall remain out of date.


Article 7.54. Post-propedeutic phase restriction

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board may, if it considers that the teaching capacity, which for the postpropedeutic stage of an education, for which a limitation of the first registration has been fixed, is not sufficient for an unlimited registration, decide to refuse registration for the postpropedeutic phase of that training to those who have not already been registered to the institution of the training establishment.

  • 2 In this Article, if a propedeutic phase is not set in an education, "postpropedeutic phase" means the phase in a bachelor ' s degree that follows the first period of time in an education with a study of 60 credits.


Article 7.54a

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link [ Red: Expiring renumbering.]

Article 7.55. Limitation of registration OU on the basis of available organisational and technical capacity

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Open University ' s setup may suspend enrollment opportunity for a particular training or education unit to the extent and for so long as the organizational and technical capacity for taking care of this training or In order to do so, education units are required. Taking into account the restrictions referred to in the first sentence, registration shall be in the order of notification for the training or education unit concerned, in accordance with procedural rules to be established by the institution.


Article 7.56. Restrict enrollment in universities and colleges based on the need of the labor market

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Where the offer of graduates of a given training exceeds or threatens to exceed the needs of the labour market and in other situations where this is desirable in connection with labour market control; The number of persons who may be registered for the first time for the first year of the first year of study may be found, under a ministerial arrangement, to determine the number of persons likely to be registered for the first period of study after the adoption of the ministerial arrangement. related training at all universities or colleges to which it is linked a division of that number into each of the institutions referred to.

  • 3 A ministerial arrangement as referred to in paragraph 1 shall be adopted no later than 1 May of the year preceding the year of study in which this arrangement applies for the first time.


Article 7.56a. Restriction enrolation training and teacher training in the field of art on the basis of the need of the labour market [ Expandable by 01-12-2002]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.57. Training identification

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

For the purposes of this paragraph, colleges with the same name as the same training courses are subject to training by universities at the same level. For the application of Article 7.56 In addition, the same level of training is provided by universities or colleges of related training courses.


Paragraph 4a. Rules for the selection of students for training courses with a restriction on admission

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.57a. General

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The first enrolation of a student for the propedeutic phase of an education, attached to a university or college, for which on the basis of Section 4 the entry into force of this Title shall be subject to compliance with or pursuant to this paragraph, without prejudice to the provisions of this paragraph, without prejudice to the provisions of this paragraph, without prejudice to the provisions of Title 2 of this chapter.

  • 2 The registration shall not be made on presentation of proof of admission issued by Our Minister, unless otherwise provided by or pursuant to this paragraph.

  • 4 In the case of ministerial arrangements, rules shall be laid down for the issue and the period of validity of the certificate of authorisation.


Article 7.57b. Preparation for issuance of certificates of authorisation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister shares those who are on the grounds of Article 7.24, first or second paragraph , application for training, on the basis of the average percentage of final examination in five classes.

  • 2 Classes referred to in the first paragraph shall have as their limits:

    • a. Higher than or equal to 8,

    • b. Less than 8 but higher than or equal to 7,5,

    • c. Less than 7,5 but higher than or equal to 7,

    • d. Less than 7 but higher than or equal to 6,5 and

    • e. Less than 6,5.

    Classes b to e are referred to as lotation classes.

  • 3 The method of classification of classes, referred to in paragraph 2, of those who have completed an educational form not linked to a numerical list shall be governed by the Ministerial Regulations referred to in Article 3 (2). Article 7.57a, fourth paragraph .

  • 5 Our Minister shares the prospective students of Aruba, Curaçao, Sint Maarten and the public bodies of BES in the class, as referred to in paragraph 2 (a). The manner in which such designation is made, and the number of prospective students that may be designated at the highest, shall be determined by the ministerial arrangement, which is to be Article 7.57a, fourth paragraph .


Article 7.57c. Issuing proofs of admission

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 3 In the case of the lots referred to in paragraph 2, the chances of the opening shall be lower than 100% in the case of the entry in the second paragraph. Article 7.57b, second paragraph, points (b) to (e) , lotation classes as respectively 9: 6: 4: 3.

  • 4 In the ministerial arrangement referred to in Article 7.57a, fourth paragraph It may be stipulated that the Secretary of State shall be able to allocate at most a percentage of the number of places per training to be determined by that scheme to candidates to whom the award of the award would give rise to an imequity of the type.


Article 7.57d. Proof of admission for the same training to more than one university

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If training is provided by more than one university, the selection procedure for such training shall be carried out jointly. In doing so, the Articles 7.57b and 7.57c in accordance with the second and third paragraphs. The candidates shall communicate to our Minister the order of their preference for universities.

  • 2 Our Minister determines, as far as possible, taking into account the preference of the next student, but by any means by the lot for which university is subject to proof of admission. Article 7.57c, third member , shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • 3 Our Minister may assign up to five per cent of the number of places per training to candidates who, after applying the second member, are in possession of a proof of admission for the same training at a university other than that of the first preference, if this would give rise to a lack of fairness.


Article 7.57e. Selection by Settings

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Taking account of the admission rights referred to in Article 7.57c, first paragraph An institution board may assign a percentage of training places to be determined by the institution of the institution to candidates selected by himself who have special qualifications in his opinion.

  • 2 Where the institution management authority gives application to the first member, it shall disclose in due time:

    • a. the qualitative selection criteria which it wishes to take into account, the number of which is at least two,

    • (b) the rules of an administrative nature, in so far as it does not derive from the fourth paragraph;

    • c. the percentage referred to in the first paragraph; and

    • (d) whether candidates can be admitted to participation in the selection procedure by two or three times.

  • 3 To the special qualifications referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2, the final grades of final examination may also be included. In that case, the number of special qualifications referred to in paragraph 2 (a) shall be at least two.

  • 4 The candidate wishing to benefit from the selection referred to in paragraph 1 shall be published to the relevant institution management authority upon request by Our Minister, provided that he continues to participate in the final procedure.


Article 7.57f. Limitations of participation in the selection procedure

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If under Article 7.25 (a) further training requirements have been set, the selection procedure may be attended only by the person who provides proof to the pleasure of our Minister, that by his appearance at any of the ministerial rules, as provided for in the Article 7.57a, fourth paragraph , time to be determined for those requirements to be met.

  • 3 The person who took part in the final procedure for a particular training and has not obtained any proof of admission may take part in the final procedure for that training up to two times.

  • In the application of the second paragraph, participation in the procedure for the period of study between 1998 and 1999 or previous years shall not be involved. In addition, participation in the procedure for the period of study for the year 1999-2000 does not count for the person who participated in the final procedure for the same training for the first time in the course of the study.

  • 5 It is not possible to take part in the selection procedure by the person enrolled in an education or enrolled in any year of study and wishes to register the same training to another institution.


Article 7.57g. Dissenting objection and reaction time

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

By way of derogation from the Articles 6: 7 and 7:10 of the General Administrative Law Act the period of two weeks for the submission of a statement of objection to a decision of our Minister for the issue of a certificate of admission shall be four weeks after receipt of the notice of objection to the decision of Our Minister.


Paragraph 5. Other provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.57h. House rules and order measures

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution board may lay down rules and take measures relating to the good practice of the institution's premises and premises. Those measures may include the denial of access to those buildings and areas, in whole or in part, to those who have infringed the said requirements for a period of not more than one year, or the registration of those premises for a period not exceeding one year. period is ended.

  • 2 If the person who overcomes the rules referred to in paragraph 1 has caused serious nuisance within the premises and areas of the institution and has not caused this nuisance even after notice by or because of the setting of institutions disembarkation, the institution may permanently deny that student access to the institution or terminate its registration.


Article 7.57i. Support to promote good flow of higher vocational education into a master ' s degree in scientific education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The education and examination arrangements of the colleges and universities concerned govern the manner in which the person who has completed the final examination, linked to a related bachelor degree in higher vocational education, is responsible for doing so; provided that the institution's management supports the promotion of a good flow to a related master training in scientific education.

  • 2 If the amount of support referred to in paragraph 1 corresponds to a student body of 30 credits or less, the setting board may ask for a fee to be reimbursed up to a proportional share of the amount of the legal instrument tuition fees. If the student body corresponds to more than 30 credits but does not exceed 60 credits, the setting board for the number of credits above 30 may request a fee of up to a maximum of two times the amount of study. legal tuition fees.

  • 3 If the student body corresponds to more than 60 credits, the setting board shall determine the fee rate for the remaining part.

  • 4 A student who makes use of the support while pursuing an education for which he is owed statutory tuition fees is exempted from paying a fee for the support.

  • 5 A student who uses the support and, by way of derogation from Article 7.32, third paragraph , only with that purpose is registered for an education, pays during the period that he receives support in lieu of tuition fees a fee for the support.


Article 7.58. Certificate of issue [ Expated by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.59. Student status

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The setting board shall determine the student status and shall publish it.

  • 2 The institution of the institution shall extend the student status to each student at the first entry for an education. If necessary, the institution board shall also grant the student status by tender for a subsequent year of study.

  • 3 The student status includes a training specific part and an institution-specific part.

  • 4 The training specific part shall contain in each case:

    • a. a description of the study structure and support facilities offered by the institution by the student, including in any case, understood:

      • 1. information on the design, organisation and implementation of education;

      • 2 °. student facilities; and

      • 3 °. the facilities for the provision of guidance,

    • (b) the education and examination arrangements provided for in the Article 7.13, first paragraph , and

    • c. a description of procedures which, in addition to the procedures referred to in paragraph 5 (b), B 2 °, shall be applicable to training.

  • 5 In each case, the setting-specific part shall contain:

    • a. a description of the rights and obligations of the students, arising from the particular by or under the law; and

    • b. an overview of the schemes that are designed to protect the rights of students, which include:

      • 1 °. a description of the procedures for the handling of complaints and disputes, Title 4 , as well as the procedures for the treatment of joint control disputes, as well as of the professional rights which may be derived from this Act and other statutory schemes; and

      • 2 °. a description of additional procedures for the protection of the rights of students affected by the institution's administration.


Title 4. Legal protection of students and extranei

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. Accessible facility; complaints

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.59a. Accessible facility

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall establish an accessible and unambiguous facility. The institution management system shall establish a detailed arrangement with regard to this paragraph and Section 2 , which forms part of the management and management rules.

  • 3 In this paragraph and the (2) to (4) 'person concerned' means a student, an upcoming student, a former student, an extraneus, an upcoming extraneus, or a former extraneus.

  • 4 The time limit for submitting a written appeal or objection as referred to in Article 4 Section 2 shall be six weeks.

  • 5 The facility shall confirm receipt of an incoming complaint, appeal or objection in writing to the person concerned and shall forward it to the competent institution as soon as possible after the date of receipt of the complaint. In the case of a public institution, Article 6:15, 1st and 2nd member, of General Law governing law Not applicable.

  • 7 If the facility has sent a complaint, appeal or objection to an unauthorized body, this body shall return the relevant document to the facility as soon as possible. The competent institution shall treat a complaint, appeal or objection which has been directly filed by a person concerned with that body only after the facility has intervened.


Article 7.59b. Complaints

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution board shall deal with a complaint made by a person concerned, as regards a particular institution with corresponding application of Title 9.1 of the General Administrative Law Act .


Paragraph 2. College of Appeal for the Examiners; Arbitration Advisory Committee

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.60. College of Appeals for the exams

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Each higher education institution has a college of appeal for the exams.

  • 2 The Board of Appeal shall have three or five members. The number of alternate members is not greater than the number of members. The College shall hold plenary session.

  • 3 The college may decide to set up rooms. If the College so decides, the College shall consist of at least six and a maximum of 15 members. The number of alternate members is not greater than the number of members. Each room has three or five members. She holds a full seat.

  • 4 The chairman, the deputy chairman or chairmen and the other members and any alternate members shall be appointed by the institution for a period of at least three years and not more than five years, or, in so far as it is not available to the students concerned, to the effect that the appointment of a member state of the shall, for a period of at least one and a maximum of two years, be available. The members and alternate members are not part of the setting board or of the inspection. Outside the President, at least half of the college is composed of lecturers and members of the scientific staff.

  • 6 The members and alternate members of the Board of Appeal shall be dismissed on his own request. When they reach the age of 70, their resignation will be given as of the following month. They shall be dismissed if they are unfit to perform their duties as a result of sickness or defects, and if they have been convicted of a criminal offence when they have been irretrievably rendered. Before the dismissal under the third sentence, the person concerned shall be informed of the intention to resign and shall be given the opportunity to make a hearing on the matter.


Article 7.61. Jurisdiction of the College of Appeal for the examinations

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Appeal for the examinations shall be competent in respect of the following decisions:

  • 3 Before taking into consideration the appeal, the Board of Appeal shall forward the appeal to the institution against which the appeal is addressed, with an invitation to examine, in agreement with the parties concerned, whether a friendly settlement of the dispute is possible, as far as public institutions are concerned, by derogation from Section 7.3 of the General Administrative Law . In cases where the appeal is directed against a decision of an examiner, the transmission to the relevant examination board shall be the transmission referred to in the preceding sentence. If the examiner against whom the appeal is addressed is a member of the examination board, he shall not take part in the deliberations. The body concerned shall, within three weeks, communicate to the Board of Appeal, on production of the documents relating thereto, the outcome of which the Board has been subject. If an amicable settlement has not been established, the profession of appeal shall be considered by the college.

  • 5 If the Board of Appeal considers the appeal to be well founded, it shall destroy the decision in whole or in part. The college is not empowered to make a new decision in the place of the whole or partially destroyed decision, as far as public institutions are concerned. Article 7:25 of the General Administrative Law . It may provide that, once the decision has been refused, it shall be decided in the case either, or that the examination, examination, examination or additional examination or any part thereof shall be reinstated by the application of the decision, or, if the decision is refused, to be taken in the case. (b) Conditions to be appealed. The institution whose decision has been destroyed shall, where necessary, restate the matter in compliance with the decision of the Board of Appeal. The College may set a time limit in its judgment.

  • 6 If immediate urgency so requires, the President of the Board of Appeal may make a provisional provision at the request of the author of the appeal, without prejudice to the provision of Article 7.66, second paragraph , and Article 8:81 of the General Administrative Law . The Chairman shall decide on that request after having heard the relevant institution or the relevant examiner, at least to have called.


Article 7.62. Rules of Procedure

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Court of Appeal shall adopt rules of procedure, which shall lay down detailed rules on:

    • a. the extent and composition of the Board of Appeal,

    • b. If necessary, the split in rooms, as well as the division of work across the different rooms,

    • (c) the term of office of the members and any alternate members of the Board of Appeal;

    • d. the manner in which the membership or deputy membership of the college of appeal ends,

    • e. the in Article 7.61, third paragraph , the procedure referred to and the cases in which this procedure may be omitted,

    • f. the manner in which the secretariat of the Board of Appeal is provided, and

    • g. the manner in which the chairman is to be replaced.

  • 2 The rules of procedure and amendments thereto shall be subject to the assent of the institution.


Article 7.63. Duty of intelligence

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institutions and staff members and the examiners of the institution shall provide the College of Appeal for the examinations with the information necessary for the performance of the College's task.


Article 7.63a. Jurisdiction and composition of the Arbitration Committee

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The arbitration committee shall give its opinion on objections relating to other decisions or the lack thereof on the basis of this Act and arrangements based thereon other than those referred to in the Dispute Settlement Committee. Article 7.61 .

  • 3 The dispute settlement committee shall examine whether an amicable settlement between the parties is possible.

  • 4 If there is an immediate emergency, the Chairman of the Dispute Resolution Committee may, on request, provide that the Dispute Resolution Committee shall deliver its opinion as soon as possible to the Governing Board. The chairman shall, within one week of receipt of the objection or immediate urgency, inform the person concerned and the institution of the matter as soon as possible. The setting board shall then, as far as the public institutions are concerned, by way of derogation from Article 7:10 of the General Administrative Law , within four weeks of receipt of the objection by the facility, a decision.


Article 7.63b. Decision on objections

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 3. College of Appeals for Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.64. College of Appeals for Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 There is a College of Appeal for Higher Education, established in The Hague.

  • 2 The Board of Appeal shall have at least three and a maximum of seven members, including the President. The college has an equally large number of alternate members.

  • 3 The College of Appeal shall be assisted by a Secretary. Our minister may add to the secretary officials.

  • 4 The officials working for the College of Appeal shall be under the authority of that College and shall be accountable to that college solely.

  • 5 The College of Appeal shall sit in chambers. The College of Appeal shall designate the President of a Chamber from among its members.

  • 6 The College of Appeal shall lay down, in respect of its work, rules of procedure which shall, in any event, be governed by the following rules:

    • a. the splitting of rooms,

    • b. the distribution of work across the different rooms; and

    • c. the manner in which the chairperson of the Board of Appeal and of a Chamber is replaced.


Article 7.65. Legal position of Members of the College of Appeal for Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The members of the College of Appeal for Higher Education and the Deputy Members are appointed by Royal Decree.

  • 2 The Secretary shall be appointed by a Royal Decree and shall be remunerated.

  • 4 A member or alternate member shall be dismissed by royal decree from the following month, after the following:

    • (a) has submitted a request for this purpose;

    • b. has reached the age of seventy-five years,

    • (c) having been subject to a hearing on the subject, as an illness or defect, is permanently unfit to perform its function; or

    • d. has been convicted of an irretrievable court order for a criminal offence.

  • 5 The allowance to the President, the other members and the alternate members shall be determined by royal decree on a joint proposal by Our Minister and our Minister for Finance.


Article 7.66. Jurisdiction and procedure of the College of Appeals for Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Appeals for Higher Education judges the profession that a person has brought against a decision of an institution of higher education institution which is committed to him under this law and based on it. has been taken. Appeals from the College of Appeal for higher education shall not be appealed.

  • 3 The institutions of the institution shall provide the College of Appeal with the information deemed necessary for the performance of the College of the College of Appeal.


Article 7.67. Registry office

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Registry fee is € 44 [ Red: as of 1 January 2016: € 46]. That amount shall be adjusted annually from 1 January under the arrangements of our Minister for Security and Justice in the light of developments in the Consumer Price Index. In so doing, the amount is rounded out arithmetic to the whole of the euro.


Paragraph 4. Colleges of appeal special education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7.68. College of profession special education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By way of derogation from Article 7.66, first paragraph , the management of a particular institution in a scheme may provide that the institution with regard to the philosophical nature of the institution, whether or not in cooperation with the administration of one or more other special institutions for higher education, may be education of a philosophical nature, an educational college in particular for the treatment of actions brought by a person concerned against a decision of an institution of higher education institution which has been committed to him of this Act and arrangements based thereon has been taken.

  • 3 The arrangements and amendments thereto shall be adopted in accordance with the conditions laid down in Articles 7.59a to 7.67 . The scheme as well as its amendments shall be deemed to comply with the provisions of Article 1.9, third paragraph, point (g) This condition, if our Minister has not declared within three months to consider that the administration has not complied with the provisions of Articles 7.59a to 7.67 at the time of the adoption of the course of action and, to that end, no reason to do so of the special institution which would oppose it, or which has not made sufficiently good use of it, has been able to appeal. Within three months, the objection shall be received.

  • 4 The operation of the decision of Our Minister referred to in paragraph 3 shall be suspended until the expiry of the period of appeal or, if the appeal has been lodged, on the appeal.

Chapter 7a. Tasks in the context of the they-inflow in the profession of teacher and teacher

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 7a.1. Conceptual determination

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

For the purposes of this Chapter:


Article 7a.2. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This chapter relates to the aid granted and to the Article 6.9 designated higher education institutions that meet Article 176g of the Law on Primary Education , Article 142 of the Law of Primary Education BES , Article 162j of the Law at the centres of expertise , Article 118p of the Law on Secondary Education or Article 202 of the Secondary Education Act (BES) .


Article 7a.3. Certificate Of Competence Attestation WPO , WPO BES , WEC , WVO and WVO BES

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A certificate of competence shall be awarded by the examination board of an institution which is the most appropriate for the purpose of the completion of the aptitude test. The certificate shall state which elements included the examination of competence and, where appropriate, the competence to which it is empowered, taking into account: Article 7.6, 1st paragraph .


Article 7a.4. Certificate pedagogisch-didactic training WEB

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In order to ensure that the training referred to in Article 4.2.5 of the Education and Vocational Education Act has resulted in the person concerned being able to meet the competence requirements referred to in point (a) of the third paragraph of Article 4.2.3 of that Law, the examination board of an institution which is the most likely to award a certificate of pedagogic training. The certificate shall state the elements which included the examination leading to the certificate.


Article 7a.5. Titanium

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The person who has successfully completed the examination of competence shall be entitled to conduct:

    • a. The title of PhD thesis, abbreviated to drs., where it concerns a proficiency check in which knowledge, insight and skills have been tested at the level of scientific education; or

    • b. the title of the baccalaureus, which is abbreviated to bc, in the case of a proficiency check in which knowledge, understanding and skills have been tested at the level of higher vocational education.

  • 2 The titles referred to in paragraph 1 shall be placed before the name of the title.

Chapter 8. Cooperation financed by institutions of higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 8.1. Cooperation financed by institutions of higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The scheme includes provisions on modification, lifting, accession and exit.

  • 3 A cooperation institute may be established under the scheme. The arrangements shall include provisions on the establishment and administration of the Institute, and on the provision of information by the Institute to the boards of the participating institutions.

  • 4 The arrangement may provide for the transfer of certain powers of organs of the participating institutions to organs of another participating institution or to bodies of the Cooperation Institute.

  • 5 The decisions of the Cooperation Institute, taken by virtue of any power delegated by the Board of a public institution, are subject to the legal provisions relating to the suspension and suspension of decisions of that administration under the conditions laid down in Article 2 of the delegated powers of corresponding application.

Chapter 9. The administration and establishment of the universities

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

TITLE 1. THE ADMINISTRATION AND ESTABLISHMENT OF PUBLIC UNIVERSITIES

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This title applies to the public universities.


Paragraph 1. The Board of the University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.2. General powers of the board of directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall be responsible for the administration of the University as a whole and with the management thereof, without prejudice to the powers of the Supervisory Board in accordance with this Chapter.

  • 2 The College of Management shall exercise the functions and powers conferred on the institution board by or under the Law, provided that no other provision is provided for in this Chapter.

  • 3 The chairman of the board of directors represents the university in and out of law.


Article 9.3. Composition of the board of directors; legal position members

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall be composed of a maximum of three members, including the rector magnificus of the university. As far as possible, the appointment shall take into account the balanced distribution of seats between men and women.

  • 2 Before appointing or resigning a member of the executive board, the supervisory board shall be confidential to the university council or the works council and the body within the university which, on the basis of the participation scheme, intended in Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , has been set up, on the proposed decision on appointment or dismissal. Title 2 This chapter does not apply. The hearing is done at a time when it can have a significant impact on decision-making.

  • 3 The Chairperson of the Executive Board shall be appointed by the Supervisory Board of the members.

  • 4 Detailed rules shall be laid down in the administrative and management regulations concerning the manner of nomination and appointment of the rector magnificus.

  • 5 A member of the Executive Board may be terminated in the intervening period for major reasons.

  • 6 A member of the board of directors may not also be:

    • a. Member of the Supervisory Board of the relevant university;

    • b. Dean of a faculty or member of the board of directors thereof, unless a university includes only a faculty,

    • c. Member of the Board of an Education, in so far as it applies to: Article 9.17 is set, or

    • d. Member of the Supervisory Board or of the board of directors of another university.

  • 7 In the case of, or under general management, detailed rules shall be laid down regarding the legal status of the President and other members of the Governing Board.


Article 9.4. Administrative and management rules

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Executive Board shall establish a management and management rules governing the management, management and establishment of the university.


Article 9.5. Directives to decanes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Executive Board may adopt guidelines for the organisation and coordination of the exercise of the Article 9.14, third paragraph , and 9.15, 1st Member Those powers.


Article 9.6. Accountability and intelligence college of directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall be accountable to the Supervisory Board.

  • 2 The College of Management shall provide the Supervisory Board with the information requested concerning its decisions and other acts.

  • 3 The college of directors shall provide our minister with the requested information concerning the university.


Article 9.7. Composition of Supervisory Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Supervisory Board shall be composed of at least three and a maximum of five members.

  • 2 The President and the other members shall be appointed, suspended and dismissed by Our Minister. One of the members shall be appointed on a proposal from the university council or by the works council and the body referred to in the rules of participation, as referred to in Article 13 (2). Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , set. The nomination shall contain at least two names. If the nominated candidates are not appointed by Our Minister, a new nomination will be made. Our Minister may be motivated to deviate from the second nomination. As far as possible, the appointment shall take into account the balanced distribution of seats between men and women. Our Minister appoints a member who enjoys in particular the trust of the university council, or enjoys the trust of the works council and the body that is based on the participation scheme. Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , is set up, together. The appointment shall be carried out for a period not exceeding four years.

  • 3 A member may be dismissed in the intervening period for important reasons.

  • 4 The composition, tasks and powers of the Supervisory Board shall be such that the Board can exercise a sound and independent supervision. The members of the supervisory board do not have any direct interests at the university. The members of the Board are not also employed by a Ministry or member of the First or Second Chamber of the States-General. They shall sit on a personal basis and shall exercise their duties without any burden or back-appointment. The appointment of the members of the Board shall be made on the basis of pre-published profiles.

  • 5 The university council or the works council and the institution within the university which, on the basis of the participation scheme, is intended to be Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , is set, shall be the subject of an opportunity to deliver an opinion to the Supervisory Board on the profiles referred to in the fourth paragraph.

  • 6 The Executive Board shall provide for the functionally independent administrative support to be provided by the Supervisory Board. The Supervisory Board shall have the right to consent to the appointment and dismissal of the Secretary of the Board.

  • 7 The members of the Executive Board shall attend the meetings of the Supervisory Board, unless the Board decides otherwise. They have an advisory vote.

  • 8 In the case of, or under general management, rules shall be adopted on the payment of concessions to the members of the Supervisory Board.


Article 9.8. Supervisory Board of Monitoring

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Supervisory Board shall, for the purposes of the tasks of the university, be designed to: Article 1.3, first paragraph , supervision of the execution of activities and the exercise of powers by the College of Governors and by the Board on the side of the College. In each case, the Supervisory Board shall be responsible for:

    • (a) the appointment, suspension, dismissal and determination of remuneration of the members of the college of directors;

    • b. Approval of the administrative and management rules;

    • the adoption of the budget, the annual accounts, the management report and the institution plan;

    • d. where appropriate, adoption of the common rules, as referred to in Article 8.1 ;

    • e. to monitor compliance by the board of directors of statutory obligations and dealing with the branch code, referred to in Article 2.9 ;

    • f. to supervise the lawful acquisition and to the effective and lawful use and use of the resources obtained by virtue of the Articles 2.5 and 2.6 ;

    • g. Designating an accountant as intended to Article 393, 1st paragraph, of Book 2 of the Civil Code shall report to the Council;

    • h. to monitor the design of the quality assurance system according to: Article 1.18 , and

    • (i) annual accountability of the performance of the tasks and exercise of the powers referred to in points (a) to (h) of the Administrative Report of the University.

  • 2 The supervisory board shall consult the university council at least twice a year, or the works council and the body within the institution which, on the basis of the participation scheme, is intended to be Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , set.


Article 9.9. Accountability and intelligence board of supervision

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The supervisory board is accountable to our minister.

  • 2 The supervisory board shall provide the Minister with the information requested concerning his or her action.


Article 9.9a. Designation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If there is maladministration of one or more directors or supervisors, our Minister may give the Supervisory Board a clue. A designation shall include one or more measures and shall be proportionate to the purpose for which it is to be given.

  • Maladministration is defined as:

    • a. Financial mismanagement;

    • b. serious negligence to, at least in violation of Article 1.18 , take measures necessary for ensuring the quality and good progress of education to the institution and to prevent the quality of the system of scientific education from being endangered;.

    • c. unwarranted enrichment, whether intended or not, of the legal person who maintains the institution, a driver or supervisor himself or a third party;

    • (d) unlawful acts which are understood as acting as a driver or supervisor in contraa with legal provisions which confer a financial advantage on the legal person who is the institution of the institution holds, a driver or a supervisor itself or a third party; and

    • e. to a serious extent neglect of the care of what is being claimed by reason and fairness in dealing with those involved within the institution, including harassment or threat to personnel or students by a driver or supervisor.

  • 3 In the designation, our Minister shall state the reasons on which there is an instance of maladministration and the measures to be taken in relation to them.

  • 4 An indication shall include the time limit within which the supervisory board must comply with the designation.

  • 6 When the examination referred to in paragraph 5 (a) includes the quality of education, the inspection shall involve the accreditation body in its examination.


Article 9.10. College Promotions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At a university, a college is connected for promotions. The college of promotions is made up of professors.

  • 3 In the management and management regulations, the task, composition and manner of appointment of the college for promotions shall be settled in more detail.


Section 2. Education and science practice

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.11. Faculties and training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The administrative and management rules shall determine which faculties or faculty a university includes. It shall also specify which training courses have been established in those faculties or faculty.


Article 9.12. Faculty; Dean

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The care of teaching and the practice of science is done in the faculty. The dean of the faculty is at the head of the faculty.

  • 2 By way of derogation from the first paragraph, the management and management rules may stipulate that the head of the faculty shall be a board of directors, consisting of the Dean of the Faculty, also Chairman, and one or more other members. If the first sentence has been applied, this title and title will be applied in Title 2 with the exception of Article 9.13, fourth and sixth member , under dean also means the board of the faculty. If a multi-principal administration is at the head of the faculty, a student of the relevant faculty shall be given the opportunity to attend the meetings of this Board in which meetings this student has an advisory vote. The administrative and management rules shall determine how the student referred to in the preceding sentence is to be designated.

  • 3 If a university includes only one faculty:

    • a. The rector magnificus is also dean,

    • b. stands at the head of the faculty of a board,

    • c. becomes in this title and in Title 2 with the exception of Article 9.13, fourth and sixth member , under dean also means the board of the faculty, and

    • d. The tasks and powers of the Board of the Faculty shall be exercised by the College of Directors.

  • 4 A member of the board of the faculty may not also be a member of the faculty board of that faculty.


Article 9.13. Appointment and dismissal deci

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dean is appointed, suspended and dismissed by the board of directors. The appointment shall be made for a period to be determined by the Executive Board.

  • 2 Before appointment or resignation of the Dean, the College of Management shall be confidential to the Faculty Board of the relevant faculty on the proposed decision to appoint or resign. Title 2 This chapter does not apply. The hearing is done at a time when it can have a significant impact on decision-making.

  • The dean may be suspended or dismissed in the intervening period on grounds of major importance.

  • 4 The dean possesses the capacity of Professor.

  • 5 If, at the head of the faculty, a board as intended in Article 9.12, second paragraph , State, the first, second and third paragraphs shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • 6 This article shall not apply if the Rector is also Dean.


Article 9.14. Tasks and powers dean general; faculty of office

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dean shall be in charge of the general direction of the faculty. The dean is also responsible for the administration and the establishment of the faculty for the teaching and science exercise.

  • 2 The dean shall contribute to the management of the university by, inter alia, holding consultations with the executive board in relation to the preparation of the institution plan and the budget.

  • 3 Without prejudice Article 9.5 The Dean shall establish the faculty rules of the Faculty of Management and the establishment of the faculty.

  • 4 The Faculty of Procedure requires the approval of the College of Management. Approval may be withheld only in respect of a breach of law or general interest.

  • 5 If, within a period to be determined by the Executive Board, the Faculty of Management Committee has not been established or is not fully established, the Governing College shall adopt the rules of procedure or part of the Board of Management.


Article 9.15. Other tasks and powers Dean

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dean is, without prejudice Article 9.5 , in particular:

    • (a) the establishment of the education and examination system, as specified in Article 7.13 , as well as their regular assessment,

    • (b) laying down general guidelines for the exercise of science;

    • c. to determine the annual research programme of the faculty;

    • d. to monitor the implementation of the education and examination arrangements and the annual research programme, as well as the reporting of regular reports to the college of directors;

    • e. the setting up of the examination boards and the commission, as referred to in Article 7.29, first paragraph , as well as the appointment of the members of those committees,

    • f. the implementation of the Articles 7.8b and 7.9 , with the exception of the designation of training provided for in the Articles 7.8b, third paragraph , and 7.9, 1st Member ,

    • (g) to lay down detailed rules on the procedure for exemption from the provisions of the Articles 7.25, 4th paragraph , 7.28, second to fourth paragraphs , and 7.29, 1st Member , can be obtained,

    • h. Providing a proof of admission as intended in Article 7.30a, third paragraph , the application of Article 7.30a, fifth paragraph , the implementation of Article 7.30c , and

    • (i) the conclusion of a common system of training for one or more courses with one or more decanities of other faculties;

    • j. the execution of the Articles 6.7a and 7.9b ,

    • j. establishing the procedures and criteria for the recognition of acquired competences.

  • 3 Rules shall be laid down in the administrative and management rules governing the competence referred to in point (i) of the first paragraph.


Article 9.16. Accountability and intelligence of dean

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The dean shall be accountable to the board of directors. He shall provide the college with the requested information concerning the faculty.


Article 9.17. Training and training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dean provides a multi-key executive board of each training program set up in the faculty. By way of derogation from the first sentence, it shall be sufficient to provide a training director.

  • 2 If a multi-main administration is provided, a student shall be part of it.

  • 3 Rules governing the management of training shall be laid down in the Faculty of Education.

  • 4 A member of the board of training may not also be a member of the training committee of that training.

  • 5 For the purposes of this Article, training may include a bachelor 's degree and one or more subsequent Master' s training.


Article 9.18. Training committees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A training committee shall be set up for each training or group of training courses. The task of the committee shall be to:

    • a. Opinion on the education and examination system provided for in Article 7.13 ,

    • Assess the annual assessment of the method of implementation of the education and examination arrangements; and

    • (c) give opinions to the Board of Directors of their own accord on their own initiative or on their own initiative, as provided for in Article 9.17, first paragraph , and the Dean on all matters relating to education in the relevant course of training.

    The Commission shall forward the opinions referred to in points (a) and (c) to the Faculty Council.

  • 2 To an opinion referred to in the first paragraph, Article 9.35 , introductory wording and parts B and C , mutatis mutandis.

  • 3 Rules of procedure are laid down in the Rules of Procedure with regard to the application of the first paragraph and the procedure for the appointment and composition of the training committee shall be governed, subject to a maximum of half of the provisions of the Rules of Procedure. Total number of members of the committee shall be derived from the students enrolled in the course of the training in question.

  • 4 If a faculty includes only an education, the faculty rules department may provide that the tasks and powers of the training committee are exercised by the faculty council, referred to in Article 9.37 .


Article 9.19. Responsibilities and rights of professors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 To the staff of the university, at least the professors belong. The appointment decision shall state the field of science at which the professor exercises his teaching and research duties.

  • 2 The professors are eminently responsible for the development of their assigned field of science and for the content of teaching in that field, without prejudice to the competence of the board of training intended to be provided. Article 9.17 .

  • 3 The senior professors of dismissal still retain their right to act as a promoter for five years after their dismissal.

  • 4 The professors are entitled to have the title professor. Former professors who, for health reasons, are voluntarily retired from the functional age limit of the public service, because of voluntary early retirement or from or after the achievement of the public service age, are also entitled to to pursue this title.


Paragraph 3. Research institutes and research schools

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.20. Research institutes and research schools within a faculty

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the Faculty of Law, research institutes and research schools may be established within the Faculty of Studies. The dean shall arrange for the management and establishment of these research institutes and research schools.

  • 2 Rules governing the management and management of research institutes and research schools shall be laid down in the Faculty of Procedure.


Article 9.21. Research institutes and research schools between two or more faculties within a university

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the management and management regulations, research institutes and research schools may be established within the university. Article 9.20 does not apply. The Board of Governors shall govern the management, management and establishment of these research institutes and research schools.

  • 2 In the administrative and management regulations, a faculty may be appointed, the dean of which shall exercise the powers conferred by or under this law with respect to a research institute or research school in the college of management.


Article 9.22. Internal independence of research institutes and research schools

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The faculty of office may provide for the management of a research institute or school as referred to in Article 4 (2) of the EC Treaty. Article 9.20 during a period of not more than five years, with management tasks.

  • 2 In the administrative and management regulations, the Governing Board may provide that the management of a research institute or school is as intended to be Article 9.21 during a period of not more than five years, with management tasks. The decision of the Executive Board shall be subject to the consent of the decaners of the faculties concerned.

  • If the second paragraph has been applied, the College of Governors shall make available each year the financial resources to the board of the research institute or research school.


Article 9.23. Research institutes and research schools between two or more universities

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A research institute or research school between two or more universities is established in agreement with the deans of the faculties concerned by common rules as referred to in Article 3 (2) of the Treaty. Article 8.1 -the provision for the management of the research institute or the research school to be responsible for management tasks, in which it is provided.

  • 2 Where application of the first paragraph has been applied, the colleges of management shall make available each year the financial resources to the board of the research institute or school.


Paragraph 4. Suspension and destruction decisions faculty and provision at neglect board faculty

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.24. Suspension and destruction decisions of dean and examination committees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The first paragraph shall not apply to a decision of the Dean relating to the appointment of members of the committees referred to in Article 9.15, first paragraph .


Article 9.25. Consequences of suspension and destruction [ Expandable by 11-05-2001]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.26. Provision after suspension or destruction; deadline [ Expasions by 11-05-2001]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.27. Provision for Neglect Governance Faculty or Part thereof

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the event of neglect or in conflict with the law functioning of the board of a faculty or part thereof, the college of directors, if necessary with deviation from the paragraphs 2 and 3 of this title and Section 2 of Title 2 , for a period of not more than one year for a period to be determined by the executive board, which shall be considered to be necessary. The College shall inform the Supervisory Board without delay.

  • 2 The provisions shall expire if they have not been ratified by the supervisory board within three weeks of the receipt of the notice of the administrative board.


Paragraph 5. Student's Complaintlaw [ Expaed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.28. Collective right of beklag for students [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

TITLE 2. PARTICIPATION IN PUBLIC UNIVERSITIES

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.29. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This title applies to the public universities.


Article 9.30. Choice of participation systems

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Executive Board of Directors shall decide:

  • 2 A decision as referred to in paragraph 1 may be taken every time, but not earlier than after five years have elapsed since the previous decision has been taken into force in this respect.

  • 3 The decision referred to in paragraph 1 and subparagraph (a) shall be adopted by the paragraphs 1 , 2 and 4 to 6 of this title outside of force for the relevant university. This decision is accompanied by the adoption by the executive board of a participation scheme for the benefit of the students within the university and its faculties, which is at least equivalent to the one in the paragraphs 1 , 2 , 4 and 5 of this title.

  • 4 As a result of the decision referred to in paragraph 1 and subparagraph (b), the following shall be replaced by the following: paragraphs 1 to 6 of this Title applicable to the relevant university.

  • In the case where the first paragraph of paragraph and part a application has been found, the Governing College needs to have prior agreement of the Works Council for the decision to be taken by the Executive Board in relation to the choice of the participation systems referred to in paragraph 1, as well as for the adoption of the participation scheme referred to in the third paragraph.

  • 6 The structures of participation to be established in the participation scheme shall be as close as possible to the organisational structure, decision-making procedures and responsibility divisions within the institution.


Article 9.30a. Reconciliation Joint Meeting Staff/Students Joint Meeting

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The College of Management shall have the prior assent of the Joint Assembly for each decision to be taken by the Executive Board with regard to the adoption or amendment of:

  • 3 The Governing College is also required to have the prior assent of the Joint Assembly on the broad outlines of the annual budget, paying attention in any event to the intended distribution of resources between the two institutions. policy areas education, research, housing and management, investment and staff. Article 9.36, second paragraph , shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • 4 The College of Governors shall, subject to or pursuant to the provisions of this Act, adopt rules of procedure before the Joint Assembly. Article 9.34, second paragraph, and third paragraph, introductory wording and parts f, g and j1 , shall apply mutatis mutandis. The rules of procedure shall regulate matters on which the joint assembly, without prejudice to the second paragraph, has the right of assent. If the number of members of the works council and the body referred to in paragraph 1 are not equal, the rules shall also regulate the manner in which equal influence is to be given to decision-making in the Member States within the framework of the Council. joint meeting.

  • 5 The Joint Assembly shall be empowered to invite the Executive Board at least twice a year to discuss the proposed policy on the basis of an agenda drawn up by it.


Paragraph 1. Participation within the university

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.31. University Council

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At a university, a university council is connected.

  • 2 The number of members of the Board shall be no more than twenty-four members.

  • 3 The Council consists of half of the members chosen by and from the staff, and half of the members elected by and from the students.

  • 4 Those who are members of the college of directors or supervisory board or are in charge of the function of dean of a faculty may not also be members of the Board.

  • 5 Candidates for the election of the part of the board elected by and by the staff may be appointed by staff members and by organisations of staff.

  • 6 The election of the members of the Council shall be the subject of a secret written vote. Voting for a Council agreement shall be taken only if the number of candidate members of an articletion is greater than the number of seats in favour of that articletion.

  • 7 The Council shall draw up a regulation of such a household nature and shall also regulate the manner in which funds made available by the executive board for that board and any faculty council and commissions, if any, as referred to in Article 2 (2) of the Rules of Procedure shall be adopted. Article 9.47 shall be distributed.

  • 8 The Council may or may not elect a President and one or more alternate chairpersons from among its members. The chairman, or at his party's inability to attend, shall represent the council in law.


Article 9.32. General powers and duties of university council and council members

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall, at least twice a year, allow the university council to discuss with him the general course of business in the university. The College of Management and the Board shall meet together if so requested by the Governing College, the Council, the part of the Board chosen and by the staff chosen, or the part of the Board which is to be taken out of and from the Board of Directors. The students have been chosen.

  • 2 The Council is empowered to propose to the College of Governors all matters relating to the college of directors and to make their views known. The Executive Board shall, within three months, submit to the Council the proposals, referred to in the first sentence, with a reasoned response to the Board in the form of a proposal. Before taking the decision referred to in the preceding sentence, the Governing College shall, at least once the Council has the opportunity to consult with him on its proposal.

  • 2a The Council is also empowered to invite the executive board at least twice a year to discuss the proposed policy on the basis of an agenda drawn up by it.

  • 3 The Council shall promote the ability to open up, open and consult in the university.

  • 5 The board of directors shall provide the Board in writing at the beginning of the year of study with the basic data relating to the composition of the college of directors, supervisory board, organization within the university and the main points of the college. the policy already adopted. The Governing College shall inform the Board in writing at least once a year of its policy of the past year and of its policy plans for the coming year in respect of the university in financial terms, organisational and educational fields. The Executive Board shall, without delay, notify the Board of any intention to do so as to the matters described in the institution plan.

  • 6 Without prejudice to paragraph 5, the Governing College shall provide the Board, whether requested or not, in good time with all the information which it reasonably requires for the performance of its task. It shall in any event be understood at least once a year on the level and content of the labour-Conditional arrangements and the arrangements for each group of the persons employed in the institution, the members of the College of Management, and the Supervisory board.

  • 7 If, in a particular meeting or part of it, an eminently personal interest of one of its members is at issue, the Board may determine that the member concerned does not take part in that meeting or that part of it. The Council then decides that the consideration of the matter in question takes place in a closed session.

  • 8 The Council shall report annually in writing of its activities and shall ensure that all the participants in the report are able to take note of the report. The Council shall ensure that the agendas and reports of the meetings of the Council are forwarded to the Executive Board, to the Faculty Councils and to any committees referred to in the Council. Article 9.47 , and shall be made available in a publicly accessible place at the university for the benefit of interested parties. The Board shall, at least once a year, give the committees referred to in the previous sentence the opportunity to consult with him on matters relating to the committee concerned in particular.

  • 9 The College of Governors shall ensure that the members of the Board are not disadvantaged by virtue of their membership of the Board in their position in relation to the university. The first sentence shall apply mutatis mutandis to candidate members and former members.

  • 10 The termination other than at own request of the relationship of a person employed to the university may not be related to the candidate for membership, membership or former membership of the person concerned. Yeah. The termination of the dispute with the provisions of this paragraph shall be null and void.


Article 9.33. University Council Voting Jurisdiction

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Management shall require the prior approval of the University Council for each decision to be taken by the Executive Board in respect of at least the adoption or amendment of:

  • 2 The College of Governors shall also require the prior agreement of the University Council on the broad outlines of the annual budget, as set out in Annex II. Article 2.8 . The right of assent shall not be exercised if it is part of the budget which is dealt with in terms of substance in a provision provided for or pursuant to the law.


Article 9.33a. Advisory competence of university council; student loan advisory competence

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The college of directors requires prior advice from the university council for each decision to be taken by the executive board, at least in relation to:

    • (a) matters relating to the continued existence and smooth running of business within the university;

    • b. the budget, which shall include, inter alia, the amount of the institution fee and the amount of the tuition fees, as referred to in Article 4 (2). Article 6.7, first paragraph , below Article 6.8, first paragraph Must be shown.


Article 9.34. Regulation of the University Council

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall, subject to or pursuant to this Title, adopt rules of procedure for the university council.

  • 2 The College of Governors shall, as a proposal to the Council, present the rules of procedure, including any amendment thereto, and shall not adopt it unless the proposal has acquired the agreement of two third parties of the number of members of the Board.

  • 3 At least the following shall be regulated by the Rules of Procedure:

    • (a) the matters on which the Board, without prejudice Article 9.33 , has the right to consent,

    • b. the matters on which the Board, without prejudice to Article 9.33a , has advisory rights,

    • (c) the number of members of the Board;

    • d. the manner and organisation of the elections of the members of the Board;

    • e. the term of office of the members of the Board;

    • f. the manner in which the College of Management provides information to the Board;

    • g. the time limits within which the agreement or abstention is to be decided, and the time limits within which the opinion is to be given,

    • h. the powers exercised by the Faculty Councils;

    • (i) the allocation to the part of the Board chosen from and by staff, of the powers relating to working conditions under the conditions laid down by the Labor condition law and the general measure of governance on the basis of Article 16 of that Act are assigned to the participation council,

    • (j) the award to the Board of a corresponding power as referred to in the Article 10, second paragraph, introductory sentence and part d, of the Law College for Human Rights , where then Article 21, second paragraph, of the Equal Treatment Act of Men and Women applies mutatis mutandis,

    • j1. the manner in which the power to comply is given Article 9.32 (2a) , has been awarded to the Board including the minimum period of time for which the college of directors may be invited,

    • (k) the award to the Council or to the part of the Board chosen from and by staff, of the powers of working conditions in the university, to the extent that they are not to be taken decisions of the college of directors, Article 9.33 part e , and

    • l. which of the disputes between the board of directors and the board, for which this law does not provide for a dispute settlement, shall be submitted to the disputes committee, Article 9.39 , who can bring the dispute before and whether the committee is asked for conciliation or judgement, provided that the Committee on Disputes In Its Rules Of Procedure provides for the possibility of litigation.

  • 4 The Regulation may, where it is conducive to the proper application of this Title, provide that one or more groups of persons other than that under public law, or under an employment contract or otherwise, may as a result of an invitation to tender as a student or extraneus to the university, students are considered to be undergraduates.


Article 9.35. Opinion

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

If a decision to be taken on the basis of Article 9.33a or the Rules of Procedure of the University Council, pursuant to Article 9.34, third paragraph b , in advance for advice to be submitted to the Board, the College of Governors shall ensure that:

  • a. Opinion is requested at a time when the opinion may have a significant impact on decision-making,

  • (b) the Council shall have the opportunity to consult with him before the opinion is delivered,

  • (c) the Council shall be informed in writing as soon as possible of the manner in which the opinion delivered is a result; and

  • (d) the Board, if the college of directors does not wish to follow the opinion or not, is given the opportunity to consult with him in more detail before the decision is finally taken.


Article 9.36. Special powers

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors need prior agreement of the section of the University Council chosen from and by staff for each decision to be taken by the Executive Board in respect of matters of general interest to the Board. the special legal status of the staff in the university.

  • 2 The right of assent in matters referred to in paragraph 1 shall not be exercised in so far as the relevant matter for the university is already dealt with in substance by a prescription or by a prescription under the law. collective agreement. Nor shall the right of assent be exercised in so far as joint control of the matter in question has already been exercised in a different way.


Section 2. Co-control of the faculty

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.37. Faculty Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If a university includes more than one faculty, a faculty council is attached to each faculty.

  • 2 The faculty council shall exercise in opposition to the Dean of the Faculty the law of assent and the advisory right to the university council, in so far as matters of particular concern to the faculty and the relevant faculty are concerned. Powers also have been assigned to the Dean.

  • 4 If a university includes only one faculty, the functions and powers of the faculty council are exercised by the university council.

  • 5 Staff articling of the faculty council practices opposite the Dean of the Faculty of law, intended in Article 9.50 In so far as matters of particular concern to the faculty and the relevant powers have also been conferred on the Dean.


Article 9.38. Faculty Council Consent

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Dean shall require the prior agreement of the Faculty Council for any decision to be taken by him on at least the adoption or amendment of:


Article 9.38a. General powers and tasks faculty council and members

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.32, first, second, fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth members , shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 9.38b. Faculty Rules

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Faculty Regulations shall at least regularly be subject to the subjects referred to in the Rules of Procedure. Article 9.34, third paragraph parts c, d and e .


Paragraph 3. Disputes concerning participation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.38c. Conceptual determination

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In this paragraph and Article 9.46 'participation agency' means:

  • (a) the joint meeting,

  • b. the works council,

  • (c) the institution set up under the participation scheme referred to in Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence ,

  • d. the university council,

  • e. the faculty council,

  • f. The Service Board, intended in Article 9.50 ,

  • g. Bodies of the bodies under a to f.


Article 9.39. Dispute resolution committee co-determination

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 There is a dispute settlement committee of participation in higher education consisting of three members, including a chairman, and three alternate members.

  • 2 Our Minister shall appoint the members and alternate members for four years. They shall be renewable once.

  • 3 For the appointment referred to in the second paragraph, the joint institutions and representatives of the participation bodies shall each nominate a member and an alternate member. Those two members shall nominate a third member, also Chairman, and his deputy.

  • 4 Members function without charge or back-speech.


Article 9.40. Jurisdiction and procedure of joint control of disputes

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dispute settlement committee, referred to in Article 9.39 , takes note of disputes between a participation body and the college of directors or the dean on:

  • (2) If there is a dispute between the institution established under the participation scheme, Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , the university council or the faculty council and the person or body having decision-making powers, examines the college of directors or an amicable settlement between the parties is possible. If the governing body is the body which has the power to take the decision, the supervisory board shall examine whether an amicable settlement is possible. If this proves to be not possible, the participation body referred to in the first sentence, or the person or body concerned by the decision-making body shall refer the dispute to the dispute-dispute committee.

  • 3 If the dispute relates to the failure or failure to comply fully with the opinion of a participation body, the execution of the decision shall be suspended by four weeks, unless the institution concerned has no objections to it; immediate implementation of the decision.

  • 4 The dispute settlement committee is empowered to make a friendly solution between the parties. If an amicable settlement is not reached, the dispute resolution committee shall resolve a dispute referred to it by making a binding decision, in which case it shall review whether:

    • a. the College of Directors or the Dean has complied with the requirements of the Law and the Rules of Procedure, specified in Article 9.34 ,

    • (b) the College of Directors or the Dean has, in the interests of balancing the interests concerned, have been able to make the proposal or decision in fairness; and

    • c. the board of directors or dean has acted careless with respect to the relevant participation body concerned.

  • 5 If the board of directors or the dean for the proposed decision has not received the agreement of the participation body, it may, by way of derogation from the fourth paragraph, seek permission from the arbitration board to take the decision. If the decision of the participation body not to consent is unreasonable, or if the proposed decision of the board or the dean is required by weightings, the dispute resolution committee shall grant authorisation only if the decision of the participation body is not unreasonable. organisational, economic or social reasons. In so far as it concerns a dispute over the outlines of the budget and the dispute resolution committee has not given permission to the college of directors before 1 January of the year to which the budget relates, it may the college of directors until the dispute settlement committee has taken a decision on the granting of consent, for the doing of expenditure in that year shall have up to four twelfth portions of the amounts set out in the corresponding budget lines of the previous year were included.

  • 7 The participation body may, as far as it is concerned, intervene in the advisory powers of the training committee in so far as it is in accordance with the opinion of the training committee.


Article 9.41. Dispute Envability [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.42. Dispute content of the Rules of Procedure for the University Council [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.43. Advisory Jurisdiction Dispute [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.44. Interpretation Dispute [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.45. Further Disputes [ Expaed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 4. Other provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.46. Participation bodies participation authority

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Of a decision of the Arbitration Committee is open to the Works Chamber of the Amsterdam Court of Justice. The first sentence shall not apply in respect of Article 9.40, seventh paragraph .

  • 2 A participation body may act in legal proceedings if the action seeks to comply with the college of directors or the dean of the obligations vis-vis the participation body.

  • 3 The appeal shall be filed with appeal within one month from the date of the ruling of the dispute settlement commission. The other party shall be informed of the appeal.

  • 4 An appeal may be imposed solely on the ground that the litigation committee has given an incorrect application to the law.

  • 5 A judgment of the Enterprise Chamber cannot be set up.

  • 7 If a participation body or the executive board has brought an action against a decision of the Dispute Settlement Committee on a dispute concerning the right of assent to the main lines of the budget and the Enterprise Chamber at 1 January of the year, to which the budget relates, has not yet delivered a ruling, can the college of directors, until the company chamber has delivered its verdict or if the business chamber ' s ruling leads to the establishment of a new budget, until a new budget has been adopted, for the expenditure have the amounts estimated for them in the budget on which the business office considers or has been judged.


Article 9.47. Committees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall give staff and students the opportunity to provide, if they so wish, a Staff Committee or separate committees for different staff categories or groups, and a student body. to be set. Such a committee shall be empowered to issue opinions to the university council on questions or on its own initiative concerning those matters which concern the committee concerned in particular.

  • 2 At the request of a committee, the university council shall inform the college of directors of a written opinion as referred to in paragraph 1. Article 9.32, second paragraph, third sentence , in respect of such written opinion, shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 9.48. Facilities and training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall allow the university council to use the facilities available to it and which the Board reasonably needs for the performance of its task.

  • 2 The College of Governors shall give the members of the Board of Governors the opportunity to receive, during a period of time to be determined jointly by the Executive Board and the Board, the training of members of the Board of Governors for the performance of the Board of Governors. have to do their job. The staff of the university shall be given the opportunity to receive such training in working time and with the maintenance of salary.

  • 3 This Article shall apply mutatis mutandis to the faculty boards and training committees with the exception that the Dean shall replace the College of Management.


Paragraph 5. Participation in research institutes and research schools

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.49. Participation Board of Research Institutes and Research Schools

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraphs 1 to 4 of this Title shall apply mutatis mutandis to the research institutes and research schools, of which, Article 9.23 The administration is responsible for the management tasks.


Paragraph 6. Co-determination within central services

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.50. Service board for central services

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Where the administrative and management regulations provide for the provision of central services to a university, the college shall, in accordance with rules laid down in or pursuant to general management, be one or more of the following: Persons employed in the service of such services.

  • 2 The College of Governors shall provide that a service board shall be given the opportunity to deliver its opinion in good time to the Head of the relevant department and to consult on proposed measures concerning:

    • a. the manner in which the conditions of employment and employment are applied to a central service;

    • b. the manner in which the general personnel policy is carried out at a central service;

    • c. Working conditions relating to working conditions related to employment in a central service,

    • d. the organisation and operation within a central office; and

    • e. the technical and economic performance of the service at a central service.

  • 3 The Council of Ministers shall be empowered to propose to the Head of the Service in question the matters referred to in the second paragraph.

  • 4 The head of the department concerned shall be required to take the prior agreement of the Council of Ministers for any measure which he is empowered to take and on which the Council has advised the latter on the basis of the second paragraph.

  • 5 The College of Governors shall, in accordance with the duty council, adopt rules of procedure for the exercise of the rights referred to in the second, third and fourth paragraphs. In any event, the Rules of Procedure contain a dispute settlement system.


Paragraph 7. Derogation from Title 1 or Title 2

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.50a. Deviation from one or more parts of Title 1 or Title 2

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At the request of the Supervisory Board, our Minister may, under conditions to be laid down by the Minister, permit a derogation from one or more parts of the Title 1 or Title 2 . The college of directors shows in case of deviation from Title 1 that is provided for in an efficient management organisation, or shows, in the case of derogation from Title 2 It provides an effective form of co-determination for staff and students.

  • 2 Where application of the first paragraph has been applied, the derogation shall be incorporated in the administrative and management rules.


Title 3. The administration and organization of and participation within the special universities and the philosophical universities of the world

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.51. Structural legislation, special universities, intelligence

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The boards of associations with full jurisdiction or foundations, of which the Annex In this case, universities shall be obliged to inform our Minister as soon as possible of any amendment to the association's statutes or the foundation.

  • 2 The College of Governors shall adopt rules governing the College of Management and the establishment and participation of the College within their university. In fixing those rules and amending them, the titles 1 and 2 of this chapter in so far as the nature of the university in question does not, in the opinion of the College of Management, oppose such action. Those rules determine which faculty or faculties the university includes. The Executive Board shall notify our Minister as soon as possible of those rules and amendments thereto as soon as possible. If, in the opinion of the Executive Board, it is desirable on the basis of the individual's own nature of the special university, the university may make a functional separation between supervision and administration. In that case, the Articles 9.8 to 9.9a applicable mutatis mutandis. The statutes shall state the manner in which the functional separation shall be ensured. The Executive Board shall report annually in the management report. Article 2.9 the reasons for any derogation.

  • 3 The rules and amendments thereto referred to in paragraph 2 shall be deemed to conform to the provisions of Article 1.9, third paragraph, point (h) , provided that our Minister did not declare to the college of directors within three months of the receipt of the notice, that it would be the college of directors in determining the rules or the change. of which the points to be indicated by the Commission are titles 1 and 2 of this chapter has not been respected and has not been able to rely for that purpose on the specific nature of the special university, which would oppose it, or which has not made sufficient probability of its being taken into account. Within three months, the objection shall be received.

  • 4 The operation of the decision of Our Minister referred to in paragraph 3 shall be suspended until the period of appeal has expired or, if appeal has been lodged, has been decided on the appeal.

  • 5 The College of Management shall provide the Minister with the necessary information concerning the university.

  • 6 Without prejudice to the provisions of this Article, a decision to merge shall be as set out in Article 16.16 , from the college of directors, prior agreement of the university council.

  • 7 The college of directors shall give the university council the opportunity to inform, in good time, prior to the request for consent, referred to in paragraph 6, of the completed merger impact assessment. Article 16.16a, fourth paragraph .


Title 4. Special education in universities

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. The Church Professors [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.52. Church Professors [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 2. The special chairs

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.53. Rating of the special chair of establishment

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The college of directors of a public university may, after consulting the college for promotions, be referred to in Article 9.10 , a legal person with full jurisdiction to establish a special chair at that university. The decision mentions the faculty and the science area in which the special professor of education will be given.


Article 9.54. Submission of a licence application

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The rating shall be made at the request of the board of the legal person with full jurisdiction. The administrative and management rules shall determine the manner in which a request shall be made and the documents to be submitted to the application.

  • 2 The board of directors referred to in the preceding paragraph shall provide the college of management with the necessary information on the chair established by the first-term board.


Article 9.55. Special requirements for high-teaching skills

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In order to be a special professor of education, the person concerned shall be required to have been granted the degree of Doctor by a university intended to be awarded by a university. Article 1.2 (a) or (b) , or by the Open University, that person is in possession of a PhD, obtained from such an institution, or that person in possession of a proof that the appointment has been endorsed by the Board of Directors.

  • 2 Confirmation shall be deemed to have been granted if no decision has been taken thereon within eight weeks of receipt of the application. This period may be extended by the Executive Board for a maximum period of four months. Ratification may be refused by a reasoned decision only.

  • 3 The management of the legal person with full jurisdiction shall notify the college of directors of any appointment of a professor within four weeks.


Article 9.56. Accessibility education in particular Professor

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Education, given by a special professor, is accessible to them at all times, who are entitled to attend university education.


Article 9.57. Powers and dismissal Special Professor

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Special Professor may, under conditions to be set by the Executive Board, make use of the lecture halls, facilities, collections and aids for education.

  • 2 The Special Professor shall have access by an advisory vote to the meetings of the faculty of the faculty of the examination boards.

  • 3 With the end of the month, in which a special professor has reached the functional age limit applicable to the public service, he shall be given an honorable dismissal.


Article 9.58. Special chair rating revocation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Article 9.53 is to be referred to as a rating by the college, after consulting the college of promotions, as referred to in Article 1 (2). Article 9.10 , repealed:

  • a. If it is no longer complied with by or pursuant to this paragraph;

  • b. if the special professor is neglecting education or without good soil, has interrupted this teaching for a full year;

  • c. if the importance of scientific education no longer bears the role of the rating as a result of changes in the conditions of the rating.


Article 9.59. Special Chair of the Faculty who provides education in the Divine Education [ Expensed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.60. Composition of scientific staff [ Expired on 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.61. Responsibilities and rights of professors [ Expanders by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.62. Suspension and destruction decisions of administrative bodies university [ Expandsof 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.63. Suspension and Destruction of the Promotion Parliament [ Expandes by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.64. Suspension and destruction decisions of the faculty of directors [ Expandsof 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.65. Suspension and destruction decisions of examination committees [ Expandsof 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.66. Suspension and destruction of decisions governing group, working group and research institute [ Expandsof 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.67. Consequences of suspension and destruction [ Expired on 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.68. Post-suspension provision and destruction, deadline [ Expired on 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.69. Provision for the university or part of the administration [ Expated by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.70. Provision for Neglect Governance Faculty or Part thereof [ Exporded by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.71. Decisions of faculty management, trade union and board of research institute, appeal and impairment by the board of directors [ Expandsof 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.72. Additional provisions for the settlement of disputes [ Expired on 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.73. Participation in administrative bodies [ Expired on 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.74. Legal position and financial arrangements members of the administrative bodies, committees and colleges [ Expandable by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.75. Special provisions for universities with no more than one faculty [ Verfall by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.76 [ Exchanges from 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save

Article 9.77. Student facilities special universities [ ExpOffice per 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.78 [ Exchanges from 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save

Article 9.79 [ Exp. by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save

Article 9.80 [ Exchanges from 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save

Article 9.81 [ Exchanges from 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save

Article 9.82 [ Exchanges from 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save

Article 9.83. Powers and dismissal Special Professor [ Expired on 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.84. Special Chair rating [ Extraction per 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 9.85. Special Chair of the Faculty of Education in Divine Education [ Expensed by 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 10. The Board and the establishment of the colleges

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This chapter covers the Annex of this law incorporated colleges.


Title 1. The Board and the establishment of colleges

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. The Board and the establishment of the college

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.2. College of Directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall be composed of a maximum of three members, including the President. As far as possible, the appointment shall take into account the balanced distribution of seats between men and women.

  • 2 A member of the board of directors may not be at the same time members of the board of directors of any other college.


Article 10.3. Delegation of tasks and powers

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The college of directors of a college can transfer him assigned duties and powers to the board of a faculty or board of another organizational unit as intended by law. Article 10.3a .


Article 10.3a. Faculties and other organisational units

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Governing College may set up one or more faculties or other organisational units in the administrative regulation.


Article 10.3b. Administrative and management rules

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall adopt a management and management rules governing the management, management and establishment of the School of Technology.

  • 2 In the administrative and management rules, rules shall be established concerning the establishment of the education and examination system provided for in Article 7.13 . These rules shall in any event cover the designation of the institution which determines the system of education and examination.

  • 3 If the colleges or other organisational units include faculties or other organisational units, the administrative and management regulations shall also include:

    • a. which faculties or units there are and which training courses are set up therein;

    • b. what powers the college of directors has transferred to the faculty board or the board of the relevant unit,

    • c. the composition and operation of the faculty board or the management of the unit concerned; and

    • d. the ratio of the faculty board or the board of the relevant unit to the college of directors.


Article 10.3c. Training committees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A training committee shall be set up for each training or training group, subject to the provisions of the fourth paragraph. The task of the committee shall be to:

    • a. Opinion on the system of education and examination prior to the setting-up of the rules governing the management of the procedure;

    • Assess the annual assessment of the method of implementation of the education and examination arrangements; and

    • (c) give opinions to the subcouncil of the same kind as requested or delivered on their own initiative; Article 10.25 , and the faculty management or management of the relevant organisational unit or, if the college does not include faculties, on the institution board, on all other matters relating to education in the relevant departments. training.

    The Commission shall forward the opinions referred to in points (a) and (c) to the Council of Ministers or to the relevant subcouncil.

  • 2 In so far as the opinion of the committee concerned is not followed when determining, arrangements or implementation of the teaching and examination arrangements, the decision shall state the reasons on which it is based.

  • 3 Rules of procedure shall be governed by rules of procedure relating to the application of paragraph 1 and shall be governed by the rules of procedure for the appointment and composition of the committee, it being understood that half of the total number of members shall be appointed. from the commission, from the students enrolled in the course of the training in question.

  • 4 If a faculty or other organisational unit comprises only one course of training, the rules of administration may provide that the tasks and powers of the training committee are to be exercised by the subcouncil, as referred to in Article 3 (2). Article 10.25 .


Article 10.3d. Separation of governance and supervision

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A college has a supervisory board.

  • 2 The Supervisory Board shall, for the purposes of the tasks of the college, be designed to: Article 1.3, second paragraph , supervision of the execution of activities and the exercise of powers by the College of Governors and by the Board on the side of the College. In each case, the Supervisory Board shall be responsible for:

    • (a) the appointment, suspension, dismissal and determination of remuneration of the members of the college of directors;

    • b. Approval of the administrative and management rules;

    • (c) the adoption of the budget, the annual accounts, the management report, the institution plan;

    • d. where appropriate, adoption of the common rules, as referred to in Article 8.1 ;

    • e. to monitor compliance by the board of directors of statutory obligations and dealing with the branch code, referred to in Article 2.9 ;

    • f. to supervise the lawful acquisition and to the effective and lawful destination and use of the resources of the college obtained on the basis of the Articles 2.5 and 2.6 ;

    • g. Designating an accountant as intended to Article 393, 1st paragraph, of Book 2 of the Civil Code shall report to the Council;

    • h. to monitor the design of the quality assurance system according to: Article 1.18 , and

    • (i) annual accountability of the performance of the tasks and the exercise of the powers referred to in points (a) to (h) of the Administrative Report of the University of Applied Sciences.

  • 3 The Executive Board shall provide the Supervisory Board with functionally independent administrative support. The Supervisory Board shall have the right to consent to the appointment and dismissal of the Secretary of the Board.

  • 4 The composition, tasks and powers of the Supervisory Board shall be such that the Board can exercise a sound and independent supervision. The members of the supervisory board do not have any direct interests at the college. They shall sit on a personal basis and shall exercise their duties without any burden or back-appointment. The appointment of the members of the Board shall be made on the basis of pre-published profiles. One of the members shall be appointed on a proposal from the Council of Ministers, or by the works council and the body referred to in the co-determination procedure, as referred to in Article 13 (2). Article 10.16a, third paragraph, second sentence , set. The nomination shall contain at least two names.

  • 5 The participation council or the works council and the institution within the university which, on the basis of the participation scheme, is intended to be Article 10.16a, third paragraph, second sentence , is set, shall be the subject of an opportunity to deliver an opinion to the Supervisory Board on the profiles referred to in the fourth paragraph.

  • 6 The supervisory board shall consult the participation council at least twice a year, or the works council and the body within the institution which, based on the participation scheme, is to be carried out in accordance with the rules of procedure of the Council of Ministers. Article 10.16a, third paragraph, second sentence , set.

  • 7 If, in the opinion of the College of Management, it is desirable as a result of the philosophical nature of the college, the College may, by way of derogation from the first paragraph, make a functional separation between the Board and the supervision.

  • 8 If the School makes a functional separation, paragraphs 2 to 6 shall apply mutatis mutandis. The statutes shall state the manner in which the functional separation shall be ensured. The Governing College shall indicate each year in the management report, as referred to in Article 2.9 , the reasons for any derogation.


Article 10.3e. Designation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If there is maladministration of one or more directors or supervisors, our Minister may give the Supervisory Board a clue. A designation shall include one or more measures and shall be proportionate to the purpose for which it is to be given.

  • Maladministration is defined as:

    • a. Financial mismanagement;

    • b. serious negligence to, at least in violation of Article 1.18 , take measures necessary to ensure the quality and good progress of education to the institution and to prevent the quality of the higher vocational education system from being compromised;

    • c. unwarranted enrichment, whether intended or not, of the legal person who maintains the institution, a driver or supervisor himself or a third party;

    • (d) unlawful acts which are understood as acting as a driver or supervisor in contraa with legal provisions which confer a financial advantage on the legal person who is the institution of the institution holds, a driver or a supervisor itself or a third party; and

    • e. to a serious extent neglect of the care of what is being claimed by reason and fairness in dealing with those involved within the institution, including harassment or threat to personnel or students by a driver or supervisor.

  • 3 In the designation, our Minister shall state the reasons on which there is an instance of maladministration and the measures to be taken in relation to them.

  • 4 An indication shall include the time limit within which the supervisory board must comply with the designation.

  • 6 When the examination referred to in paragraph 5 (a) includes the quality of education, the inspection shall involve the accreditation body in its examination.

  • 7 If the college is a functional separation as intended in Article 10.3d, seventh paragraph , it shall be applied by analogy to the sixth paragraph of application.


Paragraph 2. Dispute Settlement

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.4. House rules and order measures [ Expandsof 19-03-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.5. Dispute settlement

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution board of a college shall make provision for the settlement of disputes concerning the decisions of the institutions of the university which are not already subject to appeal under this law.


Paragraph 3. Special provisions relating to the administration of a public college [ Expale per 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.6. Duty of information [ Expated by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.7. Suspension and dismissal of staff member councilor [ Expandsof 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 4. Special provisions relating to the administration of a special college

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.8. Administration of special college

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 A special college is maintained by a legal person with full jurisdiction which, according to the statutes, is intended to provide education within the meaning of this Law without seeking to make a profit.

  • 2 The management of the legal person shall transmit any amendment to the statutes or regulations within four weeks of its adoption to our Minister.

  • 3 The College of Governors shall provide our Minister with the necessary information on the College of Governors.


Article 10.8a. Board Regulation Deviation [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 2. The Board and the Establishment of Incorporated Colleges with Legal Personality [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.9. Governing bodies [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.10. College of directors [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.11. Board of directors [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.12. Regulation of the Board of Procedure [ Expaed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.13. Distribution of competencies and dispute settlement provisions of corresponding application of the application [ Expandsof 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.14. Suspension and destruction decisions of governing bodies [ Expandes by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.15. Facilities after suspension and destruction [ Expandable by 11-05-2001]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.16. Provision for Management Neglect [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 3. Participation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.16a. Choice of participation systems

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Executive Board of Directors shall decide:

  • 2 A decision as referred to in paragraph 1 may be taken every time but not earlier than after five years have elapsed since the previous decision has been taken into effect in this respect.

  • 3 The decision, referred to in the first paragraph, introductory sentence and subparagraph a, states that Articles 10.17 to 10.25 out of operation for the relevant college. This Decision is accompanied by the adoption by the Executive Board of a participation scheme in favour of students within the college, which is at least equivalent to the provisions of Articles 10.17 to 10.25.

  • 4 As a result of the decision referred to in paragraph 1 and point (b), this Title shall apply to the relevant college.

  • 5 In the case where the first paragraph, introductory sentence and subparagraph a, application has been found, the Governing College need the prior agreement of the Works Council for the decision to be taken by the Executive Board in relation to the choice of the participation systems referred to in paragraph 1, as well as for the adoption of the participation scheme referred to in the third paragraph.

  • 6 The structures of participation to be established in the participation scheme shall be as close as possible to the organisational structure, decision-making procedures and responsibility divisions within the institution.


Article 10.16b. Reconciliation Joint Meeting Staff/Students Joint Meeting

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If a decision as referred to in Article 10.16a, first paragraph, introductory wording and part a , has been taken, there is a joint assembly attached to a college. The members of the works council and the members of the body set up under the rules of participation referred to in Article 10.16a, third paragraph, of the second sentence of this Article shall be included in this meeting.

  • 2 The College of Governors shall have the prior assent of the Joint Assembly for each decision to be taken by him concerning the adoption or amendment of:

  • 3 The Governing College is also required to have the prior assent of the Joint Assembly on the broad outlines of the annual budget, paying attention in any event to the intended distribution of resources between the two institutions. policy areas education, research, housing and management, investment and staff. Article 9.36, second paragraph , shall apply mutatis mutandis.

  • 4 The College of Governors shall, subject to or pursuant to the provisions of this Act, adopt rules of procedure before the Joint Assembly. The Articles 10.21, 2nd paragraph , and 10.22, introductory wording and parts f, g and j1 , shall apply mutatis mutandis. The rules of procedure shall regulate matters on which the joint assembly, without prejudice to paragraph 2 and third paragraph, has the right of assent. If the number of members of the works council and the body referred to in paragraph 1 are not equal, the rules shall also regulate the manner in which equal influence is to be given to decision-making in the Member States within the framework of the Council. joint meeting.

  • 5 The Joint Assembly shall be empowered to invite the Executive Board at least twice a year to discuss the proposed policy on the basis of an agenda drawn up by it.

  • 6 The Governing College is also required to give prior agreement to the Joint Assembly for a merger decision as referred to in Article 4 (2) of the Treaty. Article 16.16 .

  • 7 The Executive Board shall, in good time prior to the request for agreement, referred to in paragraph 6, inform the Joint Assembly of the proposed merger impact assessment, as referred to in paragraph 2. Article 16.16a, sixth paragraph .


Article 10.17. Participation Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At each college, a participation council is connected. If a college includes one or more faculties or other organizational units, each faculty and each of the relevant units shall be referred to as a subcouncil. Article 10.25 It's connected.

  • 2 The number of members of the Board is at a university with fewer than 750 students at most ten members, with 750 to 1250 students up to 14 members and with 1250 or more students up to twenty-four members.

  • 3 The council consists of half of the members chosen by and from the staff, and half of them elected by and from the students.

  • 4 They may not also be members of the Board of Directors, the Management Board, the Board of Directors, the Management Board or the Management Board of a faculty or other organisational unit.

  • 5 Candidates for the election of the part of the board elected by and by the staff may be appointed by staff members and by organisations of staff.

  • 6 The election of the members of the Council shall be the subject of a secret written vote. Voting for a Council agreement shall be taken only if the number of candidate members of an articletion is greater than the number of seats in favour of that articletion.

  • 7 The Council shall draw up a regulation governing such a domestic business and shall also regulate the manner in which sums paid by the institution may be made to the council and to any council or commissions as referred to in Article 2 (2). Article 10.34 It's divided.

  • 8 For the purposes of application of paragraph 1, the Ad Programme may be regarded as an organisational unit to which a Subcouncil as referred to in Article 10.25 is connected. If a part of the Ad program is implemented by an institution as intended in Article 1.1.1, part b, of the Education and Vocational Education Act the staff of that institution for the purposes of applying the third and fifth members shall be considered to be the staff of the college.


Article 10.18. Chairman of the Council of the Council of Ministers [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.19. General powers and duties of participation council and councillors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The college of directors shall, at least twice a year, inform the Board of Participation in order to discuss with him the general course of business in the High School of College. The College of Management and the Board shall meet each other, if so requested by the College of Directors, the Council or the Council, which shall be chosen from and by the staff or from and by the students.

  • 2 The Council has jurisdiction over all matters, to propose the College of Governors and to make their views known to the College. The Executive Board shall, within three months, submit to the Council the proposals, referred to in the first sentence, with a reasoned response to the Board in the form of a proposal. Before taking the decision referred to in the preceding sentence, the Governing College shall, at least once the Council has the opportunity to consult with him on its proposal.

  • 2a The Council is also empowered to invite the executive board at least twice a year to discuss the proposed policy on the basis of an agenda drawn up by it.

  • 3 The Council shall promote the ability to open up, open and consult with each other in the School.

  • 5 The board of directors shall provide the Board in writing at the beginning of the year of study with the basic information relating to the composition of the college of directors or the central management, the organisation within the college, the distribution of tasks between the board of management and the central management and the main points of the policy already adopted. The Executive Board shall inform the Board in writing at least once a year of the policy pursued by him in the past year and of the policy plans for the year ahead in respect of the financial, organizational and financial and educational field. The College of Directors shall inform the participation council without delay of any intention in relation to matters described in the plan referred to in Article 4 (1). Article 10.20 (a) .

  • 6 Without prejudice to paragraph 4, the Governing College shall provide the Board, whether requested or not, in good time with all the information which it reasonably requires for the performance of its task. To that end, at least once a year, information on the level and content of the labour-conditionsarrangements and agreements per group of the persons employed in the institution, the members of the college of directors, and the information on the Supervisory board.

  • 7 If, in a particular meeting or part of it, an eminently personal interest of one of the members of the Board is in dispute, the Board may provide that the member concerned does not take part in that meeting or part thereof. The Council then also provides that the treatment of the matter in question is taken at a closed meeting.

  • 8 The Council shall report annually in writing of its activities and shall ensure that all parties to the report are able to take note of the report. The Council shall ensure that the agendas and reports of the meetings of the Council are forwarded to the Executive Board, to the Boards of Ministers, to the committees, if any, and to any joint participation council and, if any, to the Council. Access to a general public place at the college for the benefit of interested parties. The Board shall, at least once a year, give the committees referred to in the previous sentence the opportunity to consult with him on matters relating to the committee concerned in particular.

  • 9 The College of Governors shall ensure that the members of the Board are not disadvantaged by virtue of their membership of the Board in their position in relation to the School of Higher Participation. The first sentence shall apply mutatis mutandis to candidate members and former members.

  • 10 The termination other than at own request of the relationship of a person employed in the School shall not be related to the candidate for membership, membership or former membership of the Board of the Council. The termination of the dispute with the provisions of this paragraph shall be null and void.


Article 10.20. Participation Council Participation Jurisdiction

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Management shall have the prior consent of the Board of Participation for any decision to be taken by the Executive Board in respect of at least the adoption or amendment of:

    • a. The Set-up Plan,

    • b. The design of the quality management system according to Article 1.18, first paragraph , as well as the proposed policy in the light of the results of the quality assessment, Article 2.9, second paragraph, second sentence ,

    • c. the student status,

    • d. the rules of management, and if Article 10.8a is applicable, the relevant part of the Statute,

    • e. the education and examination scheme specified in: Article 7.13 , with the exception of those referred to in the second paragraph, points (a) to (g) and (w) and the third paragraph,

    • f. rules in the field of working conditions,

    • g. the choice of participation systems, specified in Article 10.16a, first paragraph ,

    • h. the policy of the college of directors in the application of Article 7.51 , and the rules referred to in the fourth paragraph of that Article, and

    • (i) a merger decision as referred to in Article 16.16 .

  • 2 The college of directors shall, on the occasion of the request for agreement with a merger decision referred to in paragraph 1, inform the participation council of the merger impact assessment drawn up in good time prior to the request for a decision. Intended in Article 16.16a, fourth paragraph .

  • 3 The College of Governors is also required to give prior assent to the Council on the main lines of the annual budget, with particular reference to the intended distribution of resources between Member States and the Commission. policy areas education, research, housing and management, investment and staff. Article 9.36, second paragraph , shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 10.20a. Advisory power participation council; student advisory power

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The board of directors shall, without prejudice to the provisions of the Article 10.20 , prior to giving advice to the participation council for each decision to be taken by the executive board, at least in relation to:

    • a. Matters relating to the objectives, survival and good practice of the High School, including an institutional merger as referred to in Article 3 (2). Article 16.16, first paragraph , and an administrative merger as referred to in Article 16.16, second paragraph,

    • b. the budget, which shall include, inter alia, the amount of the institution fee and the amount of the tuition fees, as referred to in Article 4 (2). Article 6.7, first paragraph , below Article 6.8, first paragraph Must be shown.

  • 3 The introductory wording of the first and second paragraphs shall apply mutatis mutandis in respect of an intended decision of the Supervisory Board on the profiles, intended to be used in the Article 10.3d, 4th paragraph .


Article 10.21. Control of participation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall adopt, subject to or pursuant to the provisions of this Title, a participation regulation in favour of the School of Higher Schools.

  • 2 The College of Management shall, as a proposal to the Board of Participation, lay down the rules of procedure, including any amendments thereto, and shall not adopt it unless the proposal provides for the agreement of two third parties of the number of members of the Board has acquired.


Article 10.22. Co-control regulation content

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The participation rules shall at least be regulated:

  • a. the matters on which the participation council is to, without prejudice to: Article 10.20 , has the right to consent,

  • b. the matters on which the participation council is to, without prejudice to the Article 10.20a , has advisory rights,

  • c. the number of members of the participation council,

  • d. the manner and organisation of the elections of the members of the Board;

  • e. the term of office of the members of the Board;

  • f. the manner in which the institution management provides information to the Board;

  • g. the time limits within which the agreement or abstention is to be decided, and the time limits within which the opinion is to be given,

  • (h) the powers exercised by the subassemblies,

  • (i) the allocation to the part of the Board chosen from and by staff, of the powers relating to working conditions under the conditions laid down by the Labor condition law and the general measure of governance on the basis of Article 16 of that Act are assigned to the participation council,

  • (j) the award to the Board of a corresponding power as referred to in the Article 10, second paragraph, introductory sentence and part d, of the Law College for Human Rights , where then Article 21, second paragraph, of the Equal Treatment Act of Men and Women applies mutatis mutandis,

  • j1. the manner in which the power to comply is given Article 10.19 (2a) , has been awarded to the Board including the minimum period of time for which the college of directors may be invited,

  • (k) the award to the Council, or to the part of the Board chosen by the staff and by the staff, of the powers relating to working conditions in higher education, to the extent that such powers are not to be taken by the institutions of the institutions of the institutions or institutions of the institutions, Article 10.20 (f) , and

  • l. which of the disputes between the institution board and the board, for which this law does not provide for a dispute settlement, shall be submitted to the dispute settlement committee to whom the dispute may be brought; and whether the committee is asked for mediation or judgement, provided that the committee for disputes to which the university is affiliated provides in its rules of procedure the possibility of such a dispute.


Article 10.23. Opinion

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

If the decision to be taken is based on the provisions of the Rules of Procedure Article 10.22 (b) , in advance for advice to be submitted to the participation council, the institution's management shall ensure that:

  • a. Opinion is requested at a time when the opinion may have a significant impact on decision-making,

  • (b) the Council shall have the opportunity to consult with him before the opinion is delivered,

  • (c) the Council shall be informed in writing as soon as possible of the manner in which the opinion delivered is a result; and

  • (d) the Board, if the institution board does not wish to follow the opinion or not, is given the opportunity to consult with him in more detail before the decision is finally taken.


Article 10.24. Special powers

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution board shall require the prior consent of the part of the participation council chosen from and by the staff to be decided on any decision to be taken by the institution with regard to matters of general interest for the special legal status of the staff in the college.

  • 2 The right of assent in matters referred to in paragraph 1 shall not be exercised in so far as the relevant matter for the High School of Justice is already settled in substance in a provision or in a provision under the law; or by collective agreement.

  • 3 Before appointing or resigning a member of the institution's administration, the participation council, or the institution within the university which, on the basis of the participation scheme, is to be taken into account shall be taken up; Article 10.16a, third paragraph, second sentence , to this end, has been identified as confidential in respect of the proposed decision to appoint or resign. The hearing is done at a time when it can have a significant impact on decision-making.


Article 10.25. Subcouncils

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Board of Governors of a faculty or other organisational unit shall exercise the right of assent and the right of advice to the Board of Participation, in so far as matters relating to the relevant part of the Board of Governors are concerned. the college in particular, and the relevant powers have also been conferred on the board of that faculty or other organisational unit.


Article 10.26. Provisions of the corresponding application of the Dispute Resolution Committee

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dispute settlement committee, referred to in Article 9.39 , is competent in disputes within the colleges.

  • 2 The Articles 9.39 , 9.40 and 9.46 shall apply mutatis mutandis to the colleges of higher education, subject to the understanding that the latter shall be understood as 'participation body':


Article 10.27. Competence Committee for Disputes [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.28. Dispute Envability [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.29. Dispute Substance Participation Regulation [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.30. Advisory Jurisdiction Dispute [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.31. Interpretation Dispute [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.32. Further Disputes [ Expaed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.33. Participation Council Participation Council [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.34. Committees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall give staff and students the opportunity to submit, if they so wish, a Staff Committee or separate committees for separate staff categories or groups, and a student body in the field of staff. -to set Such a committee shall be empowered to issue opinions to the Council of Ministers, on request or on its own initiative, on those matters which concern the committee concerned in particular.

  • 2 At the request of a committee, the participation council shall inform the institution board of a written opinion as referred to in the first paragraph. Article 10.19, second paragraph, third sentence , in respect of such written opinion, shall apply mutatis mutandis.


Article 10.35. Joint Participation Council [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.36. Joint Committees [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 10.37. Derogation under special circumstances

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Where special circumstances permit the proper application of one or more parts of this title in a college or in a number of colleges which are maintained by the same legal person with full jurisdiction, may To allow our Minister, at the request of the institution board, to derogate from this title in respect of one or more parts.


Article 10.38. Waiver in relation to religious or philosophical beliefs

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 On grounds relating to religious or philosophical beliefs which underlie the School of Education, our Minister may, at the request of the board of directors of a special college, grant a derogation from the rules of this Title. At its request, the College of Management shall demonstrate that this request is supported by a majority of two third parties both from the staff of the college and from the students involved in the college.

  • 2 Our Secretary of State shall declare the exemption if the grounds on which it is based are no longer present or if it is no longer supported by a two-thirds majority of each of the categories referred to in the first paragraph.

  • 3 The College of Governors shall inform our Minister every five years about the state of play of the grounds of the waiver and of its support.


Article 10.39. Facilities and training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall state the participation council with the use of the facilities available to it and which the Board reasonably needs for the performance of its task. The institution's board shall give the participation council the opportunity to meet during working time as far as possible.

  • 2 The institution board shall give the members of the participation council the opportunity to receive, during a period of time to be determined jointly by the Governing Council and the Council, the training which the members of the Board are responsible for the performance of the Board of Directors. have to do their job. The staff of the college shall be given the opportunity to receive such training in working time and with the maintenance of salary.

  • 3 The first and second paragraphs shall apply mutatis mutandis to subcouncils and training committees.

Chapter 11. The Steering Committee and the Establishment of the Open University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. The Board of the Open University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.1. General powers of the college of directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Board of Trustees of the Open University is in charge of the Board of the Open University as a whole and with its management, without prejudice to the powers of the Supervisory Board according to this Chapter.

  • 2 The chairman of the board of directors represents the Open University in and out of law.


Article 11.2. Composition of the board of directors; legal position members

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall be composed of a maximum of three members, including the Chairperson. As far as possible, the appointment shall take into account the balanced distribution of seats between men and women.

  • 2 Before appointing or resigning a member of the executive board, the Supervisory Board shall be confidential to the university council or, if the College of Management has decided that the Law on Works Councils with the exception of Chapter VII B applies, the joint meeting of the works council and the body set up under a participation scheme established by the college of directors for the benefit of the students of the Open University, on the proposed decision on appointment or dismissal. The hearing is done at a time when it can have a significant impact on decision-making.

  • 3 A member of the executive board may be dismissed in the intervening period for important reasons.

  • 4 If the College of Management only consists of the Chair, the Supervisory Board shall arrange for the replacement of the Chairperson in his absence or absence.

  • 5 A member of the board of directors may not also be a member of any other governing body of the Open University.

  • 6 In the case of, or under general management, detailed rules shall be laid down regarding the legal status of the President and other members of the Governing College.


Article 11.3. Administrative and management rules; education and examination arrangements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The board of directors shall adopt the administrative and management rules governing the management, management and establishment of the Open University.

  • 2 The rules of procedure lay down rules on the establishment of the system of education and examination provided for in the Article 7.13 . These rules shall in any event cover the designation of the institution which determines the system of education and examination.


Article 11.4. Accountability and intelligence of the board of directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The College of Governors shall be accountable to the Supervisory Board.

  • 2 The College of Management shall provide the Supervisory Board with the information requested concerning its decisions and other acts.

  • 3 The College of Management shall provide our Minister with the requested information concerning the Open University.


Article 11.5. Composition Board of supervision; members financial arrangement

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Supervisory Board shall be composed of at least three and a maximum of five members.

  • 2 The chairman and the other members of the supervisory board are appointed by our minister, suspended and dismissed. One of the members shall be appointed on a proposal from the University Council or, if the College of Management has decided that the Law on Works Councils with the exception of Chapter VII B is applicable, the joint meeting of the works council and the body set up on the basis of a participation scheme established by the college of directors for the benefit of the students of the Open University. The nomination shall contain at least two names. If the nominated candidates are not appointed by Our Minister, a new nomination will be made. Our Minister may be motivated to deviate from the second nomination. As far as possible, the appointment shall take into account the balanced distribution of seats between men and women. Our Minister appoints a member who enjoys in particular the trust of the university council or, if the college board has decided that the Law on Works Councils with the exception of Chapter VII B applies, the joint meeting of the works council and the body set up on the basis of a participation scheme adopted by the college of directors for the benefit of the students of the Open University. The appointment shall be carried out for a period not exceeding four years.

  • 3 A member may be dismissed in the intervening period for important reasons.

  • 4 The composition, tasks and powers of the Supervisory Board shall be such that the Board can exercise a sound and independent supervision. The members of the supervisory board do not have any immediate interests at the open University. The members of the Board are not also employed by a Ministry or member of the First or Second Chamber of the States-General. They shall sit on a personal basis and shall exercise their duties without any burden or back-appointment. The appointment of the members of the Board shall be made on the basis of pre-published profiles.

  • 5 The university council or the works council and the institution within the university which, on the basis of the participation scheme, is intended to be Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , is set, shall be the subject of an opportunity to deliver an opinion to the Supervisory Board on the profiles referred to in the fourth paragraph.

  • 6 The Executive Board shall provide for the functionally independent administrative support to be provided by the Supervisory Board. The Supervisory Board shall have the right to consent to the appointment and dismissal of the Secretary of the Administrative Support.

  • 7 The Executive Board shall attend the meetings of the Supervisory Board, unless the Board decides otherwise. The College of Governors shall have an advisory vote in that regard.

  • 8 In the case of, or under general management, rules shall be adopted on the payment of concessions to the members of the Supervisory Board.


Article 11.6. Supervisory Board of Monitoring

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Supervisory Board, with a view to the tasks of the Open University, is intended to Article 1.3, fourth paragraph , supervision of the execution of activities and the exercise of powers by the College of Governors and by the Board on the side of the College. In each case, the Supervisory Board shall be responsible for:

    • (a) the appointment, suspension, dismissal and determination of remuneration of the members of the college of directors;

    • b. Approval of the administrative and management rules;

    • the adoption of the budget, the annual accounts, the management report and the institution plan;

    • d. where appropriate, adoption of a common scheme as referred to in Article 8.1 ;

    • e. to monitor compliance by the board of directors of statutory obligations and dealing with the branch code, referred to in Article 2.9 ;

    • f. to supervise the lawful acquisition and to the effective and lawful use and use of the resources obtained by virtue of the Articles 2.5 and 2.6 ;

    • g. Designating an accountant as intended to Article 393, 1st paragraph, of Book 2 of the Civil Code shall report to the Council;

    • h. to monitor the design of the quality assurance system according to: Article 1.18 , and

    • (i) annual accountability of the performance of the tasks and exercise of the powers referred to in points (a) to (h) of the Administrative Report of the University.

  • 2 The supervisory board shall consult the Board of Participation at least twice a year or the works council and the body within the institution which, based on the participation scheme, is to be carried out in accordance with the rules of procedure laid down in Article 2 (2). Article 9.30, third paragraph, second sentence , set.


Article 11.7. Accountability and intelligence requirements of the Supervisory Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The supervisory board is accountable to our minister.

  • 2 The Supervisory Board shall provide the Minister with the information requested concerning his or her action.


Article 11.7a. Designation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If there is maladministration of one or more directors or supervisors, our Minister may give the Supervisory Board a clue. A designation shall include one or more measures and shall be proportionate to the purpose for which it is to be given.

  • Maladministration is defined as:

    • a. Financial mismanagement;

    • b. serious negligence to, at least in violation of Article 1.18 , take measures necessary for ensuring the quality and good progress of education to the institution and prevent the quality of the higher vocational education system or the scientific establishment of the scientific community. education at risk;.

    • c. unwarranted enrichment, whether intended or not, of the legal person who maintains the institution, a driver or supervisor himself or a third party;

    • (d) unlawful acts which are understood as acting as a driver or supervisor in contraa with legal provisions which confer a financial advantage on the legal person who is the institution of the institution holds, a driver or a supervisor itself or a third party; and

    • e. to a serious extent neglect of the care of what is being claimed by reason and fairness in dealing with those involved within the institution, including harassment or threat to personnel or students by a driver or supervisor.

  • 3 In the designation, our Minister shall state the reasons on which there is an instance of maladministration and the measures to be taken in relation to them.

  • 4 An indication shall include the time limit within which the supervisory board must comply with the designation.

  • 6 When the examination referred to in paragraph 5 (a) includes the quality of education, the inspection shall involve the accreditation body in its examination.


Section 2. Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.8. Courses Open University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In the administrative and management regulations, the training courses are governed by the Open University.


Article 11.9. Responsibilities and rights of professors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 To the staff of the Open University are in any case the professors. The appointment decision shall state the field of science at which the professor exercises his teaching and research duties.

  • 2 The professors are primarily responsible for the development of the field of science allocated to them and for the content of teaching in that field, without prejudice to the competence of the college of directors in the field of education. and examination arrangements.

  • 3 The senior professors of dismissal still retain their right to act as a promoter for five years after their dismissal.

  • 4 The professors are entitled to have the title professor. Former professors who, for health reasons, are voluntarily retired from the functional age limit of the public service, because of voluntary early retirement or from or after the achievement of the public service age, are also entitled to to pursue this title.


Article 11.10. College Promotions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 At the Open University is a college for promotions connected. The college of promotions is made up of professors.

  • 3 In the management and management regulations, the task, composition and manner of appointment of the college for promotions shall be settled in more detail.


Article 11.11. Training committees

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For each training or group of training courses, a training committee is set up by the executive board. The task of the committee shall be to:

    • a. Opinion to the institution referred to in Article 11.3, second paragraph , on the education and examendment scheme, Article 7.13 ,

    • Assess the annual assessment of the method of implementation of the education and examination arrangements; and

    • (c) give opinions to the institution concerned, if requested or by its own initiative, in accordance with Article 11.3, second paragraph , on all matters relating to education in the training or group of training in question.

    The Commission shall forward the opinions referred to in points (a) and (c) to the university council or, if the College of Management has decided that the Law on Works Councils with the exception of Chapter VII B is applicable, the joint meeting of the works council and the body set up on the basis of a participation scheme established by the college of directors for the benefit of the students of the Open University.

  • 3 The administrative and management rules shall lay down rules of procedure as regards the application of the first paragraph and lay down the procedure for the appointment and composition of the training committee, except that half of the period of application of the training committee shall be governed by the rules of procedure of that Member State. The number of members of the committee stems from students enrolled at the Open University.


Paragraph 3. Suspension and destruction of decisions [ Expandsof 19-07-2014]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 4. Participation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.13. Joint control of OU control

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 To participation are the Articles 9.30 to 9.36 and 9.48 of corresponding application, except that the amount of the institution fee means tuition fees OU.

  • 2 The College of Governors shall also have the prior assent of the University Council or, if the College of Governors has decided that the Law on Works Councils with the exception of Chapter VII B apply, the joint meeting of the works council and the body established on the basis of a participation scheme established by the college of directors for the benefit of the students of the Open University, for each by take decisions on at least the adoption or amendment of the education and examination system, as referred to in Article 4 (1) of the Treaty. Article 7.13 , with the exception of those referred to in paragraph 2 (a) to (g), with the exception of the designation referred to in paragraph 3 and with the exception of those requirements, Article 7.30b, second sentence .

  • 4 The number of members of the University Council of the Open University is up to eighteen.


Article 11.14. Rules of the Student Council [ Expired by 01-01-2011]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.15. Advisory Competence [ Expired by 01-01-2011]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.16. Provisions of the corresponding application of the Dispute Resolution Committee

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The dispute settlement committee, referred to in Article 9.39 , is competent to deal with disputes within the Open University.


Article 11.17. College of professors [ Verfall by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.18. 'Educational supply' dispute settlement [ Exposition by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.19. Staff Council; composition and powers [ Expandable by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.20. Staff Council; other rules [ Expestablished by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.21. Staff Regulations of the Staff Council [ Disposition by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.22. Staff Council Dispute Settlement [ Vertraps by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.23. Student Council [ Expired by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.24. Suspension and destruction of decisions by the Committee of the Board of Directors and of the Board of Governors [ Expandsof 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.25. Suspension and destruction decisions of professors [ Expandsof 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.26. Suspension and destruction decisions of examination committees [ Expandsof 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.27. Consequences of suspension and destruction [ Expandable by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.28. Post-suspension provision and destruction; deadline [ Expandsof 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.29. Provision for Neglect Management [ Expired on 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 11.30. Additional provisions for the settlement of disputes [ Verfalls by 11-07-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 12. The board and the establishment of the academic hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.1. Scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This chapter is, with the exception of: Article 12.18 , applicable to academic hospitals in public universities and as regards the Articles 12.2 and 12.18 at the academic hospitals in special universities.


Title 1. The board and the establishment of the academic hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. General provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.2. General provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the management and establishment of the academic hospital, in so far as the interests of the patients so permit, account shall be taken of the interests of scientific medical education and research at the university.

  • 2 In particular, professors of the faculty of medicine, whose field of expertise shall be eligible for them, and the other members of the scientific staff working in the relevant field shall be given the opportunity to shall be responsible for the provision of scientific medical education and scientific medical examination.


Paragraph 2. The Public Academic Hospitals

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.3. Administrative hospital boards, demarcation of powers Board and Supervisory Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The governing bodies of the academic hospital are the board of directors and the supervisory board.

  • 2 The governing board shall be responsible for the rules and management of the affairs of the academic hospital as a whole, in so far as it is not conferred on the Supervisory Board by or under this Law.

  • 3 The Management Board shall exercise the functions and powers conferred on the institution board by or under the Law, to the extent that it is not otherwise determined by this Chapter or under this Chapter.

  • 4 Against a decision on the basis of Article 1.14, first paragraph , determining the portion of the state contribution for the university to which the academic hospital is entitled may be appealed by the college of directors of the university to which the academic hospital is affiliated in Agreement with the Management Board.


Article 12.4. Board of directors, size, composition, appointment and dismissal members

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The Management Board shall be composed of one Chairman and two other members. In special cases, our minister may provide that the board of directors consists of a chairman and three other members. In cases where application is given to the second sentence, the vote of the President shall give the vote if the votes are on the Board of Directors.

  • 2 The chairman and the other members shall be appointed by the supervisory board and dismissed.


Article 12.5. Legal position members of the Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Rules governing the legal status of the President and other members of the Governing Board shall be laid down in accordance with general rules of management or under general management.


Article 12.6. Board of Directors Tasks

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Without prejudice to the provisions of this Act, and without prejudice to the provisions of this Act, the Management Board shall:

    • (a) the adoption of the rules of management referred to in Article 12.7 ,

    • (b) the adoption of the budget;

    • (c) the adoption of the administrative report; and

    • (d) the adoption of the annual accounts.

  • 2 The Management Board shall, for the purposes of the academic hospital, take the necessary expenditure within the limits of the budget.


Article 12.7. Rules of administration

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The rules of administration provide a detailed arrangement of the administration and the establishment of the academic hospital.


Article 12.8. Accountability Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Management Board shall be accountable to the Supervisory Board. The Management Board shall provide the Supervisory Board with the requested information concerning the academic hospital.


Article 12.9. Representation of academic hospital

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The chairman of the board represents the academic hospital in and out of law.

  • 2 The Management Board shall appoint a Vice-Chairperson from among its members, who shall replace them in the absence or absence of the Chair.


Article 12.10. Supervisory board, size and composition, appointment and dismissal, financial arrangement members

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The supervisory board shall consist of five or seven members. The number of members shall be determined by our Minister after consultation with the Supervisory Board.

  • 2 The President and the other members shall be appointed, suspended and dismissed by Our Minister. The appointment shall be made for a period not exceeding four years, and shall be heard by the supervisory board.

  • 3 The members may be dismissed in the intervening period, including on their own request, the supervisory board.

  • 4 In the case of, or under general management, rules shall be laid down regarding compensation to the members of the supervisory board.

  • 5 The Supervisory Board shall appoint a Vice-President to replace it in the absence or absence of the Chair.


Article 12.11. Participation in Supervisory Board meetings

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Supervisory Board shall invite the Management Board to attend, in whole or in part, the meeting of the Supervisory Board, unless otherwise decided by the Supervisory Board in a particular case by reasoned decision.


Article 12.12. Supervisory Board of Monitoring

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Without prejudice to, by the way, by or under this Act, the Supervisory Board is charged with keeping an ongoing oversight of all matters of the academic hospital, including supervision of compliance with the academic hospital. hospital related laws, as well as regulations, directives, instructions and regulations issued under those laws.

  • 2 The rules of management, the budget, the annual accounts and the administrative report need either the approval or the approval of the supervisory board. Approval or consent shall be granted or withheld in whole or in respect of one or more components. If, within four weeks of the date of receipt of a decision referred to in the first sentence, the Supervisory Board has not decided otherwise, the decision has been approved or is approved. The Supervisory Board may extend that period to a maximum of eight weeks. Approval may be withheld only in respect of a breach of law or general interest.

  • 3 If, within a period to be determined by the supervisory board, the rules of management have not been established or have not been fully adopted, the supervisory board may adopt the rules of management or the missing part thereof.


Article 12.13. Accountability Board

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The supervisory board is accountable to our minister. He shall provide the Minister with the requested information concerning his actions.


Article 12.14. Participation Board and Commissions [ Expired on 01-09-1997]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.15. Divisions and other components

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Subject to or pursuant to the provisions of the Health care institutions Act decide, after consultation with the College of Governors of the University to which the hospital is affiliated, which departments and other parts the academic hospital includes.


Article 12.16. Heads of department, professors and other scientific personnel

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Without prejudice to the responsibility of the Governing Board, the responsibility for the medical treatment and care of patients shall be vested in the heads of the relevant departments. In doing so, they shall respect the organisational and financial frameworks set out by the Governing Board.

  • 2 The department heads shall be appointed as such and dismissed by the Board. In general, the head of the department is, in general, appointed only a professor of the faculty of medicine, whose field of expertise is to be considered by him.

  • 3 The Article 12.2, second paragraph Senior teachers, other than heads of department, and other members of the scientific staff whose function involves the use of patient care is also required to be appointed to the hospital.

  • 4 The appointment and dismissal of the persons referred to in the second and third paragraphs at the university shall be subject to the agreement of the Management Board. The appointment and dismissal of the persons referred to in the second and third members in the academic hospital shall be required to obtain the approval of the College of Governors.

  • 5 The Management Board shall, in agreement with the Executive Board, adopt a statement for the persons referred to in paragraphs 2 and 3. The instruction referred to in the first sentence shall, in respect of the persons referred to in the second and third paragraphs, be determined in each case:

    • a. the manner in which the mutual powers of the Management Board and the College of Directors are exercised in respect of such persons;

    • b. or the legal position of the staff of the university or the legal status of the staff of the academic hospital is applicable.


Article 12.17. Staff event, task and composition

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 There is a staff meeting, which, according to the rules of administration, cooperates to the administration of the hospital.

  • 2 The composition of the staff meeting shall be laid down in the rules of management, provided that the heads of department are at each case meeting in this convent.

  • 3 The members of the Board of Staff shall elect a Chairperson from among their members and to arrange for a Secretary to be drawn up in accordance with the rules governing the Rules of Procedure.


Paragraph 3. The academic hospitals at the special universities

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.18. Structural legislation, information requirements, annual report in particular academic hospital

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The boards of legal persons with full jurisdiction of which the special universities to which an academic hospital is connected shall lay down rules governing the administration and establishment of their academic hospital. When setting out the rules on the board and establishment of the academic hospital, Section 2 In so far as the specific nature of the special academic hospital does not, in the opinion of the Steering Board, oppose such action. They shall inform our Minister as soon as possible of those rules and amendments thereto as soon as possible.

  • 2 The rules and amendments thereto, referred to in paragraph 1, shall comply with the provisions of Article 1.14, second paragraph, point (c) This condition, if our Minister has not declared, within three months of receipt of the communication to the board, of an opinion addressed to the board, that the administration is in the process of establishing the rules or the rules governing the change of points to be indicated by him Section 2 failed to respect the specific nature of the special hospital, which would oppose it, or which has not produced sufficient plausibility, to do so.

  • 3 The boards referred to in paragraph 1 shall provide the Minister with the necessary information concerning the academic hospital.

  • 4 The operation of the decision of Our Minister referred to in paragraph 2 shall be suspended until the period of appeal has expired or, if appeal has been lodged, the appeal has been decided.


Title 2. The common policy body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.19. Establishment and task of the Joint Policy Body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The university and the related academic hospital shall jointly establish a common policy body.

  • 2 The task of the Joint Policy Body shall be to promote effective cooperation in the field of scientific medical education and research between the university and the academic hospital.


Article 12.20. Common rules

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The establishment of a common policy body shall be the subject of a common system, which shall be adopted by the Administrative Board and the Management Board, after consultation with the university council or the works council, as the Supervisory board. The joint arrangement shall be sent jointly by the College of Governors and the Supervisory Board to our Minister.

  • 2 The adoption of a common system shall be understood as meaning the amendment of that system.

  • 3 The common rules shall lay down the composition, powers, tasks and procedures of the Joint Policy Body in accordance with the provisions of this Law.

  • 4 The common rules shall determine which disputes shall be decided upon in relation to implementation or implementation thereof.


Article 12.21. Special responsibility for the common policy body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A university and the associated academic hospital shall consult each other on the coordination of their work in the field of scientific medicine and research. The Joint Policy Body shall adopt the document setting out the results of such consultations. To the extent that the university and the academic hospital have not been able to reach agreement within a reasonable period of time, the common policy body itself shall adopt the coordination of activities, as referred to in the first sentence.


Title 3. The Joint Implementing Body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.22. The Joint Implementing Body

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The College of Directors and the Management Board may, by agreement, establish a Joint Implementing Body for the implementation of the document, Article 12.21 . To this end, the agreement provides for the transfer of powers of the Executive Board and of the Management Board to the Joint Implementing Body. Decisions of the Joint Implementing Body, taken under any powers delegated by the Executive Board, may be destroyed by a Royal Decree.


Title 4. Consultation board faculty of medicine and board of directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 12.23. Consultation board faculty of medicine and board of directors

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Board of the Faculty of Medicine and the Management Board shall, by joint decision, determine the manner in which they shall consult periodically on matters relating to scientific education and research. The decision referred to in the first sentence shall lay down the composition and establishment of the consultations.

Chapter 13. The administration and the establishment of the institutions for scientific research

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 1. The Board and the Establishment of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 13.1. General management and general assembly

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The rules governing the procedure and administration of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences shall be vested in the general administration, in so far as such competence is not conferred on or under this law to other institutions of the academy. The general management shall exercise the functions and powers conferred on the institution board by or under this Law, to the extent that it is not otherwise determined by this Chapter or under this Chapter.

  • 2 The members of the academy shall constitute the general assembly. The procedure for appointing the members of the academy shall be governed by the rules laid down in the Rules of Procedure. Article 13.2 .

  • 3 The members of the General Board shall be chosen by and from the General Assembly.

  • 4 The general management shall be accountable to the general meeting. It shall provide the general meeting and our Minister with the requested information.

  • 5 Our Minister may award a salary or stipend to one or more members of the General Administration. Rules governing the legal status of members of the general board to whom a remuneration has been granted shall be laid down or under general rules of management.

  • 6 The chairman of the general board represents the academy in and out of law.


Article 13.2. The Regulation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the purposes of the arrangements governing the administration and establishment of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences, the General Assembly shall, subject to or pursuant to this Law, lay down certain rules of procedure.

  • 2 The rules governing the appointment, suspension and dismissal of members of the general administration and their replacement in their absence or absence shall be governed by the rules of procedure.

  • 3 The General Board shall communicate to our Minister the Rules of Procedure and any amendment thereto.


Title 2. The Board and the Establishment of the Royal Library

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 13.3. General governance

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The jurisdiction of the rules and administration of the Royal Library shall be vested in the general administration in so far as such jurisdiction is not conferred on the librarian by or under this law. The general management shall exercise the functions and powers conferred on the institution board by or under the Law, in so far as it is not determined otherwise by or under this Chapter.

  • 2 The Governing Council shall consist of a chairman, also a member, and a maximum of four other members. The number of members is determined by our minister.

  • 3 The members of the General Board are appointed by Our Minister, suspended and dismissed. The appointment shall be made for a period to be determined by our Minister.

  • 4 The members of the general administration may be heard by Our Minister, the other members of the general management, and shall be suspended in the intervening period.

  • 5 Our Minister may award a salary or stipend to one or more members of the General Administration. In the case of, or under general management, rules shall be laid down concerning the legal status of the members of the general board to whom a remuneration has been granted.

  • 6 The chairman of the general board represents the library in and out of law.


Article 13.4. Government Accountability [ Expestablished per 01-01-2015]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 13.5. Librarian

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Within the framework of the policy adopted by the general government, the charge of the Royal Library rests with the librarian.

  • 2 The librarian has the task of preparing and implementing the policy of the general administration.


Article 13.6. Regulation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For the purposes of the system of administration and establishment of the Royal Library, the general administration shall adopt rules of procedure, subject to compliance with or pursuant to the provisions of this Law.

  • 2 The Rules of Procedure shall, in any event, regulate the replacement of the members of the Governing Board in the absence of an absence or absence.


Title 3. Other provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 13.7. Service Commissions [ Falling per 26-06-1996]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 13.8. Publicity

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The general administration provides information on the institution to interested parties and interested parties, on request, as well as on its own initiative. The rules of procedure govern the cases in which the provision of information is omitted.

  • 2 The general administration lays down rules for the calculation of rates when providing information on request.


Article 13.9. Suspension and destruction of decisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The decisions of the general administration may be destroyed by Royal Decree. The provisions of the first sentence shall apply mutatis mutandis to the decision of the General Assembly of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences establishing or amending it in Article 13.2 Regulation.

  • 2 The decision on suspension or destruction shall be placed in the Official Gazette.


Article 13.10. Job Neglecting Scheme

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If, in the judgment of Our Minister, the General Administration seriously neglects his task, our Minister may take the necessary provisions.

  • 2 The provisions shall not be affected earlier than after the general administration has been given the opportunity to carry out his task properly within a period to be set by our Minister.

  • 3 Our Secretary of State shall immediately inform the two Chambers of the States of the European Union of the provisions of the first paragraph which have been adopted by him.


Article 13.11. Provision after suspension and destruction [ Expandable by 11-05-2001]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 14. Appeals to the administrative court

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 14.1. Appeal to the Board-Law Section of the Council of State [ ExpOffice by 01-01-2013]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 14.2. Effects of the award of post-appeal rights

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • (1) If the ruling on an appeal against a decision as referred to in the Articles 6.14 (4), fourth paragraph, second sentence and 7.17 For the purpose of registration or approval, the effects thereof shall take effect with effect from the year of study after the calendar year in which the judgment was delivered.

  • 2 Where appeal is made against the ruling, the proceedings of the judgment referred to in paragraph 1 shall be suspended until the time limit for appeal is expired or, if appealed, is on the appeal. Definitely.

Chapter 15. Deductions from expenditure, damages and penalties

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 15.1. Deductions from expenditure

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 If one or more organs of an institution as referred to in Article 1.2 (a, c) or (d) , acting in violation of the provisions of, or under this law, or, if the Supervisory Board is a designation as intended for the purposes of Article 9.9a , 951, second paragraph, sixth sentence , 10.3e Other 11.7a whether the administration does not comply with a designation referred to in Article 9.51, paragraph 8, that the Secretary of State may decide that the national contribution, including an advance, is to be withheld, in whole or in part, or suspended.

  • 3 Our Minister, once again, is responsible for the contribution of the state, if it appears that the reason for the application of the first or second paragraph has expired.


Article 15.2. Compensation for the non-entitled participation in education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The person who is not registered and uses education or examination facilities for the purposes of education of a person in the Annex The institution shall, by default, owe it to the institution for damages, which shall be determined by the institution's management:


Article 15.3. Fine non-entitled participation in education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The person who is not registered and uses education or examination facilities for the initial education of a person in the Annex of this law, shall be penalised by a fine of the second category.


Article 15.4. Fine non-compliance with identification requirement

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The person responsible for education or examination facilities for initial education in the Annex of this Act, shall, on that occasion or immediately thereafter, be required to take part in the first claim by or on account of the management of the institution or by a person or persons appointed by that board or by his or her name and by his or her name; and address the evidence to which he is entitled to take part, to give a proper access to the address.

  • 2 The person who acts in violation of paragraph 1 shall be penalised by a fine of the first category.


Article 15.5. Fine, wrongly issued certificates

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Any person participating in an institution listed in the Annex to this Act, in issuing a certificate without having undergone, on the one hand, the person who carried out the examination or examination in question, the person who carried out the relevant examination or examination, the institution has declared that the certificate can be issued, shall be penalised by a fine of the third category.


Article 15.6. Fine non-entitled granting degrees and titles

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 3 The person acting in violation of the first or second member shall be punished by a fine of the first category.


Article 15.7. Character of the offences

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Articles 15.3 , 15.4 , 15.5 and 15.6 criminal offences are offences.

Chapter 16. Transitional provisions inter alia in connection with the introduction of the law and regulations related to merger, conversion, division, transfer and administrative transfer

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.1. Temporary provisions of Chapter 16

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The Articles 16.2 to 16.6 , 16.8 and 16.9 lapse on a date to be determined by royal decree which may be made different for the different articles.


Paragraph 1. Educational powers and legal status

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.2. Maintenance of educational competence former engineering university Delft Technical college [ Expale by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.3. Enforcement evidence of sufficient pedagogical and didactic preparation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In addition to the proofs of sufficient didactic preparation obtained before 1 August 1993 at a university or before 1 September 1993 at a university, as well as the declarations of sufficient didactic preparation based on Article 3 (1) of the Treaty. 54, paragraph 4, or Article 110a (4) of the Law on higher vocational education were obtained, as such, the evidence of sufficient pedagogical and didactic preparation existing on 31 July 1986.


Article 16.4. Enforcement of legal position (s) members of the administration

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Until the date of entry into force of the general measure of administration specified in the Articles 13.1 and 13.3 , the rules in force at the time of entry into force of this Act in respect of the relevant members of administrative bodies shall continue to apply.


Section 2. Education and pre-training requirements

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.5. Additional and deviant pre-training requirements Initial teacher training courses [ Expandes by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.6. Deviant pre-training requirements higher training training training [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.7. Preparatory periods for training music and dance [ Expandable by 01-01-2006]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.8. Final terms for basic education training courses [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.9. Vertical education community vocational education-hbo

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Vocational training provided for in Article 12.3.9, first paragraph, of the Education and Vocational Education Act , which is provided by the special college of Haarlem or by the legal person to whom the maintenance of that college is carried forward, remains Article E. 65, second paragraph, of the Act of Import W.H.B.O. applicable.


Article 16.10. Designated education [ Expappointed by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 3. Certificates and titulature

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.11. Certificates

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Those who have obtained a certificate of a completed graduate examination or propedeutic examination as referred to in the Law on Scientific Education, final examination or propedeutic exam as referred to in the Law on the Law of the Law of the European Union. higher vocational education or examination of a diploma programme as provided for in the Law at the Open University, shall be deemed to have obtained that certificate under this law.


Article 16.12. Title of doctor

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Those entitled to conduct the title of Doctor under the Law on Scientific Education or the Law at the Open University are deemed to have obtained that right on the basis of the Article 7.22, first paragraph As stated in that provision on 31 August 2002.

  • 2 The doctorate in godlaw or philosophy, obtained from a Dutch ecclesiastical establishment of scientific education, which already granted this doctorate on 1 January 1960, gives the right to the title of doctor. Article 7.22, third paragraph , as that provision was made by 31 August 2002, applies.


Article 16.13. Other titanium

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Those who are on the basis of the Law on Scientific Education, the Higher Vocational Education Act, the Import law W.H.B.O. whether the Law at the Open University is entitled to conduct one or more of the titles governed by those laws are deemed to have obtained that right under the law Article 7.20, first paragraph As stated in that provision on 31 August 2002.

  • 2 The first paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to the training courses provided for in Article 16.11, second paragraph But only to the extent that, under the Law on Experiments Law, the right to conduct the title of an engineer has been awarded, or the title of the title of the baccalaureus has been granted.

  • 4 By way of derogation from Article 7.20, first paragraph, introductory wording and point (c) As that provision stated on 31 August 2002, the person who was registered for the international legal, legal, legal and legal political authority referred to in the Academic Statute in the academic statute 1992-93 is the same as that which was registered in the in the course of the study year 1993-94, or the period of study 1994-95 completed by training, by completing the final examination, entitling them to carry out the study Article 7.20, first paragraph, point (d) , as provided for in that provision on 31 August 2002, provided that the examination board has, at its request, placed an endorsement on the certificate in question.


Paragraph 4. Doctorates International Institute for Social Studies

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.14. Doctorates International Institute for Social Studies

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The doctorate may be obtained from the International Institute of Social Studies at the Gravenhage on the basis of the promotion. It shall have access to any person who has taken the final examination by means of a training in the third member who has successfully completed the final examination, or to whom on the basis of Article 7.10a, first, second or third members , the degree Master has been granted, without prejudice to the second paragraph.

  • 3 Our Minister decides on the basis of which training courses, provided by the International Institute of Social Studies, can be obtained access to the promotion. The decision shall not be taken after, after the satisfaction of our Minister by the institution's institution, proof has been furnished of sufficient quality of the relevant teaching activities and evidence of compliance with the second paragraph.

  • 4 Our Minister may withdraw a decision as referred to in paragraph 3 if it has been found that the quality of the relevant teaching activities has not been sufficient for a number of years or whether it is not or is no longer fulfilled Second member.

  • 5 If our Minister intends to apply to the fourth member, he shall issue a warning to the institution of the institution, specifying a time limit within which such warning shall be due and consultations with him if necessary. of that effect. The time limit within which the warning must be given shall be at least three months. In deciding on the withdrawal, our minister shall determine the date on which the revocation takes effect, such that those who have already made the preparation of the promotion available can obtain the doctorate within a reasonable period of time.

  • 6 The operation of the decision of Our Minister referred to in paragraph 4 shall be suspended until the period of appeal has expired or, if appeal has been made, has been decided on the appeal.


Paragraph 5. Mergers, conversion, division, transfer and administrative transfer of higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.15. Administrative transfer of public college [ Expale by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.16. Administrative, institutional merger and scope

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The legal person who maintains a special college may delegate the maintenance thereof to another legal person who maintains a special high school of higher education and which fulfils the requirements of the law. Article 10.8, first paragraph or may merge with a legal person who maintains another special college. The transfer of the maintenance and the merger referred to in the first sentence of this Regulation shall be regarded as an administrative merger.

  • 2 A legal person who maintains two or more colleges of higher education may merge them into a college. This aggregation shall be regarded as an institutional merger.

  • 3 The transfer referred to in paragraph 1 shall be effected by a notarial deed. By that act, the transferring legal person shall also undertake to transfer rights in respect of premises, land and movable property. That Act shall also apply in the form of a deed of delivery intended in Book 3 of the Civil Code . The Act also provides that the body to which or the legal person is to be transferred to the institution shall set up the staff in equal relations with the institution from the date of transfer.

  • 4 By taking account of the first and third paragraphs, the transferee body shall, without prejudice to the rights and obligations of its legal predecessor arising out of the law, enter or the recipient legal person without prejudice to the rights and obligations of its predecessor. the transition to civil law is required.

  • 5 The Articles 16.16 to 16.16c , with the exception of Article 16.16, second paragraph, shall apply mutatis mutandis to the legal persons who maintain special universities.


Article 16.16a. Terms of merger

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 An institutional or administrative merger shall not be established after approval has been granted by our Minister. The first sentence shall also apply where the transfer of a management of legal persons to an institution as referred to in the Law on education and vocational education maintaining, or a school as intended in the Law on secondary education to a legal person who maintains an institution.

  • 2 The legal person or legal persons or institutions shall jointly submit an application to our Minister for obtaining the approval referred to in the first paragraph. The application shall be accompanied by:

    • a. A merger impact assessment drawn up by the legal person concerned or by legal persons or by the institutions concerned; and

    • b. a written declaration of consent of the co-determination councils, or, in so far as it concerns a special university, the university councils, on the proposed merger preceded by the knowledge of the merger effect assessment by the participation councils, respectively, the university councils.

  • 3 The written declaration of consent referred to in paragraph 2 (b) shall be part of the communication referred to in Article 1.8, third paragraph .

  • 4 The merger impact assessment shall include at least a representation of:

    • a. the motives for the merger,

    • b. The alternatives to the merger,

    • c. the timeframe within which the merger will be realized,

    • d. the targets to be achieved,

    • e. the effects of the merger on freedom of choice, in particular the effects of the merger on the distribution of provisions and the diversity of educational offerings in higher vocational education,

    • f. the costs and benefits of the merger,

    • g. the impact of the merger on staff and students, including the impact on services and facilities and any consequences for other interested parties,

    • h. the manner in which the merger is communicated; and

    • i. the manner in which the merger is evaluated.

  • 5 A model form for the merger impact assessment shall be established by ministerial arrangement.


Article 16.16b. Key

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister may withhold approval if, as a result of the merger, the actual variation of the teaching offer, both in terms of the distribution of provisions and the diversity of training offered in higher education, having regard to the whole of the provisions in the field of education, is significantly impeded.

  • 2 Our Minister grants his approval of an institutional merger if this is necessary for the continuation of the rights and obligations of one or more of the institutions concerned under the law.

  • 3 Our Minister shall advise on the approval referred to in paragraph 1 by the Advisory Committee referred to in Article 3 (2). Article 6.2, second paragraph .

  • 4 Our Minister shall lay down policy rules on the exercise of the powers provided for in paragraph 1.


Article 16.16c. Review and renewal

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister decides within 13 weeks on an application as intended Article 16.16b .

  • 2 The period referred to in the first paragraph may be extended for a maximum of 13 weeks. This extension shall be communicated to the applicant within the 13 weeks referred to in paragraph 1.


Article 16.17. Conversion, splitting and relocation of the university

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our minister can approve of the fact that a paid college is being split up or a different place of establishment is being given. Our Minister may attach conditions to his approval.


Article 16.18. Division of legal persons from which a special college is based

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In the case of a split referred to in Article 334a of Book 2 of the Civil Code of a legal person maintaining a particular high school of higher education, the division deed shall stipulate that the existing and split legal person will maintain the high school or the transferee of the person acquiring the higher education. High school. In the latter case Article 16.16, second and third paragraphs , mutatis mutandis.


Article 16.19. Amendment to the Annex to the Law of Law

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the case of a merger as referred to in Article 16.16 the body or legal person which maintains the relevant institution after the merger, referred to in Article 16.16, shall be deemed to be included with immediate effect in the Annex to this Act and the body or legal person shall be deemed to be the merger, referred to in Article 16.16, has been deemed to be no longer in the Annex to be included in this Act.

  • 2 In case of conversion, splitting or relocation of a college, in accordance with Article 16.17 , in case of aggregation of two or more colleges, the resulting colleges are deemed to be included with immediate effect in the Annex to this law and the colleges from which they arise shall be deemed to be from that point of view. no longer be included in the Annex.

  • 3 In the case of a division of a legal person and transfer of the maintenance of a high school as referred to in Article 3 (2), Article 16.18 the legal person who maintains the High School after the splitting shall be deemed to be included with immediate effect in the Annex to this Act and the legal person who maintained the division for the division shall be deemed to have been established from that date onwards. is no longer to be included in that Annex.

  • 4 In the event of the abolition of a public college or loss of entitlement to the funding of a special college, this School shall be deemed to be no longer included in the Annex of this Act with immediate effect.


Paragraph 6. Legal protection

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.20. Transitional period of study beginning years of higher vocational education [ Expired by 01-01-2006]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 7. Contributions from the Netherlands for theological and life-to-life education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.21. Contribution from the State's coffers to the designated theological and philosophical universities and seminars [ Expandsof 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 16.22. Contribution from Rijks greenhouse for the benefit of chairs due to the Dutch Reformed Church at public universities [ Expats by 20-07-2007]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 17. Transitional and import provisions amending laws up to 2002

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 1. Law of 25 January 1996 (Stb. 172) [ Expired by 01-09-2005]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.1. Application Declaration Article 7.4 "old style" [ expired by 01-09-2005]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 2. Law of 28 March 1996 (Stb. 226)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.2. Derogation Article 7.43 [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 3. Law of 4 July 1996 (Stb. 434)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.3. Derogation Article 7.51 [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 4. Law of 10 April 1997 (Stb. 162)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.4. Transitional provision Privatization Act Abp

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Personnel of non-funded colleges designated under this Act that under Article B2, first paragraph (b) of the General Civil Pensions Act, as this provision stated on the entry into force of this Act, acquired the civil service status has been, under the same conditions as from 1 January 1996, a State worker within the meaning of Article 2 of the Privatization Act ABP and retains for as long as that employment relationship continues that status.


Title 5. Law of 2 July 1997 (Stb. 322) [ Reports by 01-09-2005]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.5. Derogation pretraining requirements university or high school [ Expale by 01-09-2005]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 6. Law of 2 April 1998 (Stb. 216)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.6. Derogations Article 7.3 'Old style' [ Expat per 01-09-2006]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.7. Derogation Article 7.4 "old style" [ expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 7. Law of 10 December 1998 (Stb. 733)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.8. Transitional provision of hospital school staff [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 8. Law of 3 April 1999 (Stb. 170)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.9. Review of new selection provisions and expiry clause [ Expiring per 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 9. Law of 29 June 2000 (Stb. 286) [ expired by 01-09-2015]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 17.10. Additional graduation support for temposcholarship students [ Expandes by 01-09-2015]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Chapter 18. Transitional and import provisions amending laws from 2002

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 1. Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 302)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.1. Transitional Community budget for accreditation body [ Expale by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.2. Adjustment CROHO

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The institution of the institution shall report no later than 30 days after the day of entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 302) to our Minister, when the assessment, intended in Article 1.18, first paragraph -That's from an education last night.

  • 2 Our Minister makes the out of the Articles 18.27 to 18.30 resulting changes to the Central Register of Higher Education Training, referred to in Article 6.13, known within four months of the day of the entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 302). The notice shall be communicated in the Official Gazette.


Article 18.3. Transitional investigation under Article 1 (18), second paragraph [ Verfall by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.4. Objection and occupation [ Expandable by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.5. Evaluation of accreditation in higher education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Our Minister shall transmit within five years of the entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 302) to the States-General a report on the effectiveness and effects in the practice of that law.

  • 2 Our Minister shall, within five years of the entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 302) and thereafter every four years, to the States-General, a report on the effectiveness and efficiency of the functioning of the accreditation body.


Title 2. Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 303)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 1. General

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.6. Termination of the possibility of setting up new undivided training courses in scientific education [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 2. Setting up and registering bachelor and master courses in science education; temporary enforcement of trainings in run-off

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.7. Setting of bachelor 's and master' s degree courses in science education [ Expandings by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.8. Setting of broad bachelor ' s degree courses [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.9. Setting of master training courses to teacher period preparatory higher education [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.10. Bachelor-Master Structure Entry Date Entry Date [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.11. Registration procedure for the study year 2002-2003; publication of the CROHO introduction bachelor-master structure [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.12. Registration procedure for the academic year 2003-2004; publication of amendments to the CROHO 2003-04 [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.13. Registration procedure for the study year 2004-2005 and later years of study [ Expandable by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.14. Training in run-off [ Verfalls by 04-07-2013]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 3. Undistributed training in scientific education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.15. Continuation of existing undistributed training in scientific education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A date to be decided by Royal Decree may be granted to a recipient or designated university or to the Open University training courses as referred to in Article 3 (2). Article 7.3 As provided for by that Article on 31 August 2002, it is provided that such training is linked to that institution by 31 August 2002. The date fixed at the royal decree referred to in the first sentence shall be 1 September of any year. The Royal Decree shall be adopted and published before 1 September of the year preceding the date laid down in that Decision.


Article 18.16. Continuation of existing university teacher training courses [ Expersal by 01-09-2007]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.17. Effects of termination of the undivided training structure [ Expences per 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.18. Applicable rules; Additional requirements [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 4. Conversion of law and registration of bachelor training courses in higher vocational education; temporary maintenance of continuing training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.19. Conversion of the law of bachelor courses in higher vocational education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The higher vocational training courses of which the student body was 168 credits on 31 August 2002 were subject to training as from 1 September 2002 as referred to in Article 7.3a (b) (a).

  • 2 In the course of the training referred to in paragraph 1, training courses set up and registered in the Management Central Register shall be included in higher education courses or in time for registration in that register.


Article 18.20. Continuation of existing continuing training in higher vocational education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 With effect from the date fixed by the royal decree referred to in paragraph 1, no students or extrants shall be registered for the first time for the propedeutic stage of an education as referred to in this Article.

  • 3 The date referred to in paragraph 1 may be determined differently for the different training courses.


Article 18.21. Consequences of termination of training courses, applicable rules [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.22. Registration procedure; publication of amendments to the CROHO 2002-2003 [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 5. Introduction of the 'new style' study system

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.23. Introduction credits "new style" for bachelor and master trainings and persisted trainings [ Expandable by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.24. Amendment of the Education and Exchanges Scheme [ Expandes by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.25. Conversion factor for conversion credits; rounding [ expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.26. Transformation Credits [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 6. Transitional duty accreditation lamp

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.27. Transitional duty accreditation basis for bachelor and master courses in scientific education [ Expandings by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.28. Transitional duty accreditation requirement for unclassified training in scientific education [ Expestablished by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.29. Transitional duty accreditation requirement for undergraduate training in higher vocational education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 To the bachelor courses, which are intended to be used in Article 7.3a, second paragraph, point (a) , which is a continuation of training courses for the day of the date of entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb). 303) are registered in the Central Register training courses higher education, and whose assessment, is said to Article 1.18, first paragraph , has taken place before 1 January 2000, is subject to accreditation until 31 December 2005.

  • 2 In the course of training, Article 7.3a, second paragraph, point (a) , which is a continuation of training courses for the day of the date of entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb). 303) are registered in the Central Register courses higher education, is accreditation linked up to 31 December of the sixth year after the last assessment, Article 1.18, first paragraph , where that assessment has taken place:

    • a. after 31 December 1999 and before 1 January 2004; or

    • (b) after 1 January 2004 and the institution demonstrates that the start of that assessment was due on 1 December 2001 at a date earlier than the first placing of accreditation frameworks in the State Official Journal.

  • 3 In the course of training, Article 7.3a, second paragraph, point (a) A continuation of training which, according to the Central Register of Higher Education Training, started or will commence from any year of study, during the period of study years from 2000 to 2001 until 2003-2004, is a continuation of training. accreditation linked up until 31 December of the calendar year six years after the start of the training.


Article 18.30. Transitional duty accreditation requirement for continuing training in higher vocational education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the training provided for in Article 18.20, which is a continuation of training courses for the day of the date of entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb). 303) are registered in the Central Register training courses higher education, and whose assessment, is said to Article 1.18, first paragraph , has taken place before 1 January 2000, is subject to accreditation until 31 December 2005.

  • 2 In the training provided for in Article 18.20, which is a continuation of training courses for the day of the day of entry into force of the Law of 6 June 2002 (Stb. 303) are registered in the Central Register courses higher education, is accreditation linked up to 31 December of the sixth year after the last assessment, Article 1.18, first paragraph , where that assessment has taken place:

    • a. after 31 December 1999 and before 1 January 2004; or

    • (b) after 1 January 2004 and the institution demonstrates that the start of that assessment was due on 1 December 2001 at a date earlier than the first placing of accreditation frameworks in the State Official Journal.

  • 3 In the training courses referred to in Article 18.20, which are the continuation of training courses which, according to the Central Register, have started or will commence higher education, starting from any year of study, during the period of study years from 2000-2001 to 2003-2004, accreditation is linked up to 31 December of the calendar year six years after the start of training.


Article 18.31. Transitional law powers Minister for training to which accreditation is linked under the law

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In respect of training courses which are subject to the provisions of Articles 18.27, 18.28, 18.29 or 18.30, the corresponding application shall be Article 6.5 , with the exception of first paragraph, points (b) and (c), 6.6, first paragraph , and 6.10 , with the exception of paragraph 1 (b), as applicable on 25 September 2003.


Article 18.32. Under-law accreditation for international training [ Expale per 01-01-2008]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.32a. Competence Our Minister to renew an accreditation term

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

By way of derogation from Article 5a.9, sixth paragraph and 5a.13f may our Minister ' s one-time decisions limit the time limit for accreditation for bachelor and master courses designated by him, intended Articles 7.3a, 1st paragraph and 2nd member and 7.3b , to be extended for the duration of up to two years.


Article 18.32 ab. Transitional law powers Minister for training in which the expiry date of the accreditation decree is determined

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister may decide to change the expiry date of the decision granting accreditation once.


Article 18.32 ac. Transitional powers Minister for training courses in which the maturity date of tno is determined

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister may decide to change the expiry date of the decision to grant new training once a one-off.


Article 18.32b. Application Decision on the participation of the import regime in quality care

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 For three years after the Law of 24 June 2010 (Stb) came into force. 293), an application for setting up quality care is submitted, by derogation from Article 5a.13a , on the basis of this Article and Article 18.32c .

  • 2 Within two months of the entry into force of the Law of 24 June 2010 (Stb. An institution board shall submit an application to the accreditation body, if it wishes to qualify for a decision to participate in the import regime as referred to in Article 3 (2) of the EC Treaty. Article 18.32c .

  • 3 The accreditation body shall take a positive decision on the application, referred to in the second paragraph, if the setting board for at least half of the number of training courses offered shall decide for accreditation on the basis of Article 5a.8 This is

  • 4 If it appears that all the institutions participating in the import regime have applied for positioning and quality assurance and there is a capacity for the accreditation body for new applications for the quality assurance set out in the unused during these three years, the accreditation body may take the applications under consideration, if an institution board has shown an interest in submitting an application. Article 18.32c do not apply to these requests.


Article 18.32c. Import regime for the purpose of introducing the setting test quality care

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 2 The decision to take part in the import regime shall be subject to the commitment of the institution's board of directors to an application for the purpose of setting up quality management set-up by the accreditation body. The time is not located after three years after the entry into force of the Law of 24 June 2010 (Stb. 293).

  • 4 If the accreditation body decides to provide a set of quality assurance, the duration of the accreditation or new training test referred to in the third paragraph shall be extended to six years.

  • 5 If the accreditation body decides not to provide quality assurance or if the institution board does not comply with the obligation referred to in paragraph 2, the institution's management shall be required to do so within one year from the date of the date of application of the accreditation body. on which the accreditation body has taken the decision that quality assurance is not granted or within one year of the date specified by the accreditation body, as referred to in the second paragraph, on which the institution's management is to be given to the institution in question. had to comply with that obligation, an application for review of the aspects of Article 5a.8 (2), second paragraph, points (d) to (f) , or Article 5a.10a (b), second paragraph, points (d) to (f) , to submit to the accreditation body for applications for accreditation or a test of new training submitted and assessed according to the import regime. The accreditation body shall decide within three months on the application and if the accreditation body decides positively on the application, referred to in the first sentence, the duration of the accreditation or test of new training shall be extended to six years. In case of a negative decision of the accreditation body Article 5a.12, first to fifth paragraphs , and Article 5a.12a applicable mutatis mutandis.

  • 6 By way of derogation from paragraph 3, the decision to grant accreditation or re-training shall be renewed until the end of the year of study or, if necessary, until the end of the period of study thereafter, if the The accreditation body has not decided on the application under the second or fifth paragraph.


Paragraph 7. Other import and transitional duty

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.33. Rejection after binding study advice

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

For the purposes of applying the second sentence of Article 7.8b, fifth paragraph, bachelor's training shall include the corresponding training in scientific education, as referred to in Article 18.14 or Article 18.15.


Article 18.34. Transitional measures to be granted to graduates of international training [ Verfalls by 20-07-2007]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.35. Transitional provisions for graduates of university teacher training courses [ Expats by 01-09-2007]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.36. First teaching and examination scheme of bachelor 's and master' s courses in science education [ Expandings by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.37. Access to the promotion for owners of a certificate "old style"

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The person meeting the condition referred to in Article 7.18 (b), second paragraph of Article 7.18 (a), as at 31 August 2002, shall be deemed to be the same as the person meeting the condition referred to in Article 7.18 (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) of that Article to 31 August 2002. member, point (a).


Article 18.38. Exemption pursuant to a candidate certificate

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The holder of a certificate of a candidate or final examination awarded with a good result shall be exempt from the pre-training requirements of the said Article 7.24, first or second paragraph , without prejudice to the third paragraph of that Article.


Article 18.39. Enforcement of the title candidate

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 Those who, by virtue of Article 7.20a, such as that provision on 31 August 2002 were entitled to conduct the title of candidate, shall remain entitled to pursue that title in accordance with that Article.

  • 2 The first paragraph shall apply mutatis mutandis to those who, after 31 August 2002, have completed the course examination of an education referred to in Article 18.14 or of an education referred to in Article 18.15.


Article 18.40. Enforcement title Bachelor for graduates hbo "new style"

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The person who started training in higher vocational education prior to the academic year 2002-2003 and who, after 31 August 2002 but before 1 September 2006, on the basis of which, on the basis of successful completion of the final examination of a bachelor degree in higher vocational education has been awarded the Bachelor degree, is also entitled to pursue the Bachelor ' s title in accordance with Article 7.21, second and third paragraphs , as those provisions were in place on 31 August 2002.


Article 18.41. Notification for 'Old-style' training courses [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.42. Restriction enrolation for training in science education [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.43. Training Committee [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Paragraph 8. Other provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.44. Objection and occupation [ Expandable by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.45. Evaluation [ Expated by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 3. Law of 12 September 2002 (Stb. 493)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.46. Transitional provision objection and occupation [ Expandable by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 4. Act of 30 January 2003 (Stb. 70)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.47. Transitional right applications for advisory committee on education [ Verfalls by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 5. Law of 3 April 2003 (Stb. 188)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.48. First application of Article 2.2a to the KNAW and the KB's institution plan

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.2a is applied for the first time to the institution plan that the institution board of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences shall determine the institution's governing board of the Royal Library by the year 2006.


Article 18.49. Transitional Dispute Settlement

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

In disputes concerning the determination of the national contribution on the basis of Article 16.26, fourth paragraph The rules applicable at the time of entry into force of this Law shall continue to be referred to or made in good time.


Title 6. Law of 2 July 2003 (Stb. 287)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.50. Login and registration bachelors clinical technology in the CROHO 2003-2004 [ Expandable by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.51. 'Accreditation By Law' [ Expired by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.52. Limitation of first enrolation period 2003-2004 for the clinical technology underage training, including the available teaching capacity [ Exporded by 01-09-2010]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 7. Law of 24 June 2004 (Stb. 321)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.53. Transitional period of establishment of training

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The municipality where a higher education training course in the Central Register is intended Article 6.13 , recorded training on the day before the date of entry into force of the Law of 24 June 2004 (Stb. 321), it is clear from the register that the municipality is located on the date of entry into force of that law.

  • (2) Where training is applied to: Article 7.17, second paragraph , as that provision stated on the day before the date of entry into force of the Law of 24 June 2004 (Stb). 321), the municipality in question is also a municipality where that training is established, provided that the municipality is listed on that day in the Central Register of higher education courses.


Article 18.54. Transitional application for authorisation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Requests for authorisation as referred to in Article 7.17, second paragraph As that provision stated before the date of entry into force of this Act, which was submitted before that date, the rules applicable on the day before the date of entry into force of this Law shall continue to apply.


Title 9. Law of 6 December 2001 (Stb. 681) [ Enter into force at a time to be determined]

Compare Versions Save

This part has not (yet) entered into force; see the summary of changes


Title 10. Law of 14 June 2007 (Stb. 254)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.63. Time of time Ad programme

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Persons subject to a request for a period of 1 September 2007 Article 7.11, fourth paragraph A certificate issued in respect of an ad programme shall be sent to the institution board of the institution in which the certificate was issued and shall receive a corresponding certificate and a corresponding certificate within the meaning of the said certificate. article, if our Secretary of State has agreed to the Ad Programme by decision. It shall also confer on the institutions on the basis of Article 7.10b, first paragraph , the degree Associate degree to those who, with good consequence, have passed the exam of an Ad program with a studio closet of at least 120 credits.


Article 18.64. Continuation of existing university teacher training courses

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 University first-degree teacher training schemes Article 7.4, fourth paragraph , as that provision was made on 31 August 2002, in so far as such training is linked to the relevant university or designated university on 31 August 2002, it is to be regarded as master training in scientific education, Intended in Article 7.30c .

  • 2 In the course of the training referred to in paragraph 1, the training courses set up and registered in the Central Register shall be included in the training courses referred to in the Article 6.13 , or be notified in time for registration in that register.


Article 18.65. Accreditation and registration of training provided by the Theological Faculty of Tilburg

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the training courses provided for by the institution up to 1 January 2006, Article 16.21, first paragraph, part a, below 1 ° , and with effect from that date are provided by the special university in Tilburg, the granted accreditation remains connected.

  • 2 Our Minister is responsible for amending the registration of training courses provided for in the first member of the Central Register of higher education courses. It is stated that these training courses in Tilburg are being taken care of.


Article 18.66. Accreditation and registration of training provided by the Catholic Theological University in Utrecht

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 In the training courses provided for by the institution up to 1 July 2006, Article 16.21, first paragraph, part a, below 2 ° , and with effect from that date are provided by the special university in Tilburg, the granted accreditation remains connected.

  • 2 Our Minister is responsible for amending the registration of training courses provided for in the first member of the Central Register of higher education courses. This provides for the provision of such training courses in Utrecht.


Title 11. Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.67. Philosophical universities

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 3 of Chapter 7 and Chapter 9 shall apply to the institution board of a philosophical university as referred to in Article 1.3, second paragraph , and the students involved six months after the entry into force of the articles of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), which see the abolition of the exceptional position of philosophical universities.


Article 18.68. Impact Loss Accreditation

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

If on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Part AH, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) for a training application has been given to Article 5a.12, first or fifth member As that provision was stated on that date, the reasonable period of time for such training as set by the institution shall apply.


Article 18.69. Accreditation recovery period

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

If, on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section AI, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) for a training application has been given to Article 5a.12a As that provision was based on that date, the period of recovery shall apply to that training referred to in Article 5a.12a, as that provision was stated on that date.


Article 18.70. Committee members and examiners

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The members of the examination board referred to in Article 7.12 , as that provision stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section BH, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), are considered to be the members of the examination board referred to in Article 7.12, as that provision reads after the entry into force of Article I (BH) of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119).

  • 2 The examiners referred to in Article 7.12, third paragraph , as that provision stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section BH, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), are to be considered as examiners, Article 7.12c , as that provision states, after the entry into force of Article I, Section BH, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119).


Article 18.71. Transitional Right CRIHO and Open University

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

A date to be determined by royal decree is subject to the obligations imposed on the basis of Article 7.52 as that reads after the entry into force of Article I, Section BX, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) not for the Open University.


Article 18.72. Student complaints handling

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Complaints from students submitted on the basis of Article 9.28 as that provision was used on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section CQ, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) after the entry into force of that Article, the following are to be regarded as complaints under Article 7.59b as it was worded after the entry into force of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119).


Article 18.73. College of Appeals for Higher Education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The members of the College of Appeal for Higher Education, referred to in Article 7.64 as that provision ushered for the entry into force of Article I, section CH of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), are considered to be members of the College of Appeal for Higher Education referred to in Article 7.64 as that provision reads after the entry into force of Article I, Section CH, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119).

  • 2 For sitting members of the College of Appeals for Higher Education remain in the application of Article 7.65, first paragraph , as that provision reads after the entry into force of Article I (CH) of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), the terms of appointment referred to in Article 7.65, first paragraph, as stated before the entry into force of Article I (CH) of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), in force.

  • 3 On actions brought before the College of Appeal for Higher Education, the College of Appeal considers that the Board of Appeal must comply with the rules of the articles on which the action referred to, as applicable before the entry into force of the Court of Appeal, various parts of the Law of February 4, 2010 (Stb. 119).


Article 18.74. Colleges of appeal special education

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 The colleges of appeal special education, such as those on the basis of Article 7.68 as that provision stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, item CI, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), continue to be maintained up to a maximum of one year after the entry into force of Article I, Section CI, of the Law of February 4, 2010 (Stb. 119). The treatment of appeals shall be carried out in accordance with Article 7.68, as stated on the day before the entry into force of Article I, Section CI, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119).

  • 2 After a period of not more than one year after the entry into force of Article I, CI, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) the treatment of disputes by a College of Appeal shall be special education not set up by an institution of a special institution with a philosophical or institutional nature. Institutions with a philosophical nature transferred to the College of Appeal for Higher Education, referred to in Article 2 (1) of the EC Treaty. Article 7.64 .

  • 3 The institution or institution shall grant, respectively, the resignation of the members and alternate members of the College of Appeal in particular, as referred to in the first paragraph.


Article 18.75. Higher education institutions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • Applications for a decision on the basis of Article 6.9 , as that article stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section AP, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), which has not yet been irrevocably decided, shall be treated as applications under Article 6.9, as that article states after the entry into force of Article I, Section AP, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119).

  • 2 The colleges which, according to Article 6.9 As that stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section AP, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), were designated, from the date of entry into force of Article I, Section AP, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) to be considered to be a legal entity for higher education as referred to in Article 1.1 (aa) .

  • 3 The universities as referred to in Article 1.2 (b) , as that article was stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section B of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) continue to designate universities on the basis of Article 6.9 , as that article stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section AP, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119). The articles applicable to legal entities for higher education apply to those universities, as well as the Articles 7.18 and 7.19 .

  • 5 Institutions providing accredited post-initial education as referred to in Article 1.12a As that stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), as from the date of entry into force of Article I, Section L of the Law of February 4, 2010 (Stb. 119), considered to be legal persons for higher education as referred to in Article 1.1 (aa) .

  • 6 If an institution is based on Article 1.12a As that stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119) also provides post-initial master training or an application for a key new training for a post-initial Master ' s degree has been submitted to the accreditation body before 1 September 2010, this institution may, in accordance with Article 1.1 (aa) , as this article reads after the entry into force of Article I, Section L of the Law of February 4, 2010 (Stb. (119) provide such training as a legal person for higher education, as referred to in the fourth paragraph, or may the institution provide such training in a separate private legal person who is a legal person for higher education.


Article 18.76. Application of the expired provisions guarantee institution colleges

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 2.15 as that stated on the day prior to the entry into force of Article I, Section X, of the Law of 4 February 2010 (Stb. 119), it remains applicable to a date of royal decree, except that the fourth paragraph applies solely to the deposit of the loans made at higher levels for the purposes of the transfer of the economic interest of the Member States; Claims law as referred to in the Law of 11 November 1993, Stb. 629, amending the Law on Higher Education and Scientific Research in connection with the decentralisation of housing and expenditure decisions and the arrangements for the acquisition of the economic claim.


Title 12. Law of 8 July 2011 (Stb. 369)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.77

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Our Minister may decide, with regard to one or more institutions until 1 June 2012, that the third sentence of the first paragraph of Article 7.30a As that sentence reads, after the entry into force of Article I (F) of the Law of 8 July 2011 (Stb. 369) shall remain out of application until 1 September 2013 with respect to the institution or institutions concerned.


Title 13. Act of ... 2011 (Stb ...)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.78. Fixing amounts completely statutory tuition fees 2011-2012

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By way of derogation from Article 7.45, second paragraph As it was stated on 1 September 2011, for the academic year 2011-2012 the amount of the full statutory tuition fees is determined by law.

  • The amount referred to in paragraph 1 shall be EUR 1713 per the basic rate for the 2011-2012 academic year.

  • 3 The amount referred to in paragraph 1 shall be EUR 1713 for the year 2011-2012 in accordance with the increased rate for the year of study.


Article 18.79. Fixing amounts in part statutory tuition fee 2011-2012

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By way of derogation from Article 7.45, third paragraph As of 1 September 2011, for the academic year 2011-2012 the amount of the minimum and maximum amount of partial statutory tuition fees is determined by law.

  • 2 The minimum amount referred to in paragraph 1 shall be EUR 961 per the basic rate for the academic year 2011-2012.

  • 3 The maximum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 1713 per the basic rate for the 2011-2012 academic year.

  • 4 The minimum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 961 EUR according to the increased rate for the academic year 2011-2012.

  • 5 The maximum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 1713 per the increased rate for the year 2011 to 2012.


Article 18.80. Reference date [ Expexpired on 28-02-2013]

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Title 14. Law of 28 January 2013 (Stb. 70)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.81. Fixing amounts completely statutory tuition fees according to basic rate and increased rate 2012-2013

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By way of derogation from Article 7.45, second paragraph As of 1 September 2011, for the academic year 2012-2013 the amount of the full statutory tuition fees is determined by law.

  • 2 The amount referred to in paragraph 1 shall be EUR 1771 for the year 2012-2013 in accordance with the basic rate.

  • 3 The amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be, according to the increased rate for the year 2012-2013, EUR 1771.


Article 18.82. Fixing amounts in part statutory tuition fees according to basic rate and increased rate 2012-2013

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By way of derogation from Article 7.45, third paragraph As of 1 September 2011, for the academic year 2012-2013 the minimum and maximum amount of the partial statutory tuition fees is established by law.

  • 2 The minimum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 1003 per the basic rate for the 2012-2013 academic year.

  • 3 The maximum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 1771 per the basic rate for the 2012-2013 academic year.

  • 4 The minimum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 1003 per year in accordance with the increased rate for the year 2012 to 2013.

  • 5 The maximum amount referred to in the first paragraph shall be EUR 1771 for the year 2012 to 2013 in accordance with the increased rate for the year 2012 to 2013.


Article 18.83. Amount of statutory tuition fees after the entry into force of the Law of 28 January 2013 (Stb. 70)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link
  • 1 By way of derogation from Article 7.45, first paragraph , for the 2012-2013 academic year, the amount of the full statutory tuition fee is determined by law. The full statutory tuition fee is for the study year 2012-2013 Euro 1771.

  • 2 By way of derogation from Article 7.45, second paragraph, second sentence , the minimum and maximum amount of the partial statutory tuition fee is determined by law for the 2012-2013 academic year. For the academic year 2012-2013, the partial statutory tuition fee is at least Euro 1003 and up to a maximum of Euro 1771.


Article 18.84. The Profiling Fund for Longitudinal Students

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

The institution board that has provided provisions for students on the basis of Article 7.51, first paragraph, part f, or fourth paragraph, second sentence , lays down rules relating to the handling of the mutual financial obligations in respect of storage, as referred to in Article 2 (2). Article 7.45, first paragraph, second sentence , of the law as it was worded on 1 September 2011.


Title 15. Law of 10 July 2013 (Stb. 298)

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 18.85. Transitional provision right to registration

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Prospective students at the time of entry into force Article I, Section AW, sub-section AX, of the Law of 10 July 2013 (Stb. 2013, 298) possess a proof of admission as intended in the Articles 7.57c and 7.57d , as those articles hatch on the day before the relevant item enters into force, their right to enrolt for the propedeutic phase of the relevant training will be retained.


Article 18.86. Transitional provision selection by institutions in the course of training courses with a restriction on admission

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link [ Red: Change this law.]

Chapter 19. Final provisions

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Article 19.1. Review

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

Five years after the entry into force of this Act, our Minister shall report on its operation to the two Chambers of the States-General.


Article 19.2. Entry of

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This Act shall enter into force on a date to be determined by Royal Decree, which may be made different for the various articles or parts of such articles.


Article 19.3. Citation Title

Compare Versions Save Relationships (...) (External Link) Permanent Link

This law can be cited as "Law on Higher Education and Scientific Research".

Burdens and orders that are in the State Sheet All ministers, authorities, colleges and officials, who so far as to do so, will keep their hands on the precise implementation.

Given at The Hague, 8 October 1992

Beatrix

The Minister of Education and Science,

J. M. M. Ritzen

The Minister for Agriculture, Nature Management and Fisheries,

P. Bukman

Published the twenty-sixth of November 1992.

The Minister of Justice,

E. M. H. Hirsch Ballin


Table Of Contents [ Expired by 30-12-2005]

Compare Versions Save

Annex to the Annex Law on higher education and scientific research

Compare Versions Save

For the purpose of this Annex, the financial institutions for higher education referred to in points (a) to (i) shall be: Article 1.8, first paragraph , and are included in part j the academic hospitals, intended in Article 1.13, first paragraph .

The names of legal persons set out in this Annex shall be reproduced as they are on 1 January 2004.

  • a. The public universities in Leiden, Groningen, Amsterdam, Utrecht, Delft, Wageningen, Eindhoven, Enschede, Rotterdam and Maastricht.

  • b. The special university to:

    • -Amsterdam, based on the Association for Christian Science Education;

    • -Nijmegen, based on the foundation of the Foundation Catholic University;

    • -Tilburg, based on the foundation Catholic University of Brabant.

  • c. The legal personality incumbent public colleges in Leeuwarden and Velp.

  • d. (vacant)

  • e. (vacant)

  • f. (vacant)

  • g. The special colleges:

    • -Agrarian University Of Larenstein, based on the Foundation Van Hall Larenstein;

    • -Amsterdam University of Arts, based on the Stichting Amsterdamse Hogeschool for the Arts;

    • -ArtEZ, Hogeschool for the Arts, based on the ArtEZ; Foundation

    • -Avans Hogeschool, based on the Avans Foundation;

    • -Christian Agrarian Hogeschool, assuming the foundation of Christian Agrarian High School;

    • -Christian Hogeschool Ede, based on the Foundation for Christian Higher Education at Gereformed Ground,

    • -Christian Hogeschool Windesheim, outgoing from the Christian Higher Education Association;

    • -Codarts, Hogeschool for the Arts, based on the Foundation Codarts, Hogeschool for the Arts;

    • -Design Academy, based on the Foundation The Design Academy;

    • -Fontys Hogeschool Eindhoven, on the basis of the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Hogeschool ' s-Hertogenbosch, on the basis of the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Hogeschool Roermond, on the basis of the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Hogeschool Sittard, on the basis of the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Hogeschool Tilburg, on the basis of the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Hogeschool Venlo, on the basis of the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Pedagogical Hogeschool Eindhoven, based on the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Fontys Pedagogical Technical Hogeschool Netherlands, based on the Fontys Foundation;

    • -Reformed Hogeschool, based on the Foundation for the Gereformed Higher Vocational Education Foundation;

    • -Hague Hogeschool, based on the Stichting Higher Vocational Education Haaglands and Rijnupset;

    • -University of Groningen, based on the Stichting Hanzehogeschool Groningen (Stichting Hanzehogeschool Groningen);

    • -HAS Den Bosch, on the basis of the Stichting Agrarian Hogeschool Den Bosch van de Catholic Nederlandse Boeren and Tuinders Bond;

    • -Hogeschool of Amsterdam, based on the Stichting Hogeschool van Amsterdam;

    • -Hogeschool van Arnhem en Nijmegen, based on the Stichting Hogeschool van Arnhem en Nijmegen;

    • "The Driestar", based on the Foundation for Christian Higher Education on Reformatorific basis "De Driestar",

    • -"The Kempel", based on the "De Kempel" Foundation;

    • -Hogeschool Domstad Catholic teachers ' education basic education, assuming the Foundation Catholic Training to Teachers in Primary Education;

    • -Hogeschool Edith Stein, on the basis of the Foundation for Education Centre Twente;

    • -Hogeschool Helicon, based on the Foundation Hogeschool Helicon, education from anthroposophy;

    • -Hogeschool INHOLLAND, based on the Foundation's Higher Education Foundation;

    • -IPABO Institute Amsterdam/Alkmaar, based on the Foundation for the Protestant Christian and the Roman Catholic Teacher Training for Basic Education in North Holland;

    • -Leiden University, based on the Stichting Hogeschool Leiden;

    • -Hogeschool Rotterdam, based on the Rotterdam University of Hogeschool;

    • -High School Thomas More, based on the Thomas More High School Foundation;

    • -Hogeschool Utrecht, departing from the Stichting Hogeschool Utrecht;

    • -High School of Fine Arts, Music and Dance, on the basis of the Stichting Hogeschool van Beeldende Kunsten, Music and Dance;

    • -High School of Fine Arts and Design, based on the Gerrit Rietveld Academie Foundation in Amsterdam;

    • -Higher School of the Arts Utrecht, based on the Stichting hogeschool for the Arts Utrecht;

    • -College of Zeeland, on the basis of the Foundation for the Hogeschool Zeeland;

    • -Hogeschool Zuyd, based on the Foundation Hogeschool Zuyd;

    • -Hotel School The Hague, based on the Hotel School The Hague Foundation;

    • -Iselinge, educational faculty, based on the Foundation IJsselgroep Iselinge;

    • -Catholic PABO, on the basis of the Foundation for Catholic Training for Education to the Teachers of the Basic Education,

    • -Marnix Academy Prot. Chr. College of Education Teacher Education Base Education, Outline of the Foundation of Protestant Christian Higher Vocational Education Utrecht;

    • -NHTV International Hogeschool, based on the Foundation NHTV International Hogeschool in Breda;

    • -Northern Hogeschool Leeuwarden, outgoing from the Stichting Northern Hogeschool Leeuwarden;

    • -Saxion Hogescholen, assuming the Saxion Foundation;

    • -Stenden Hogeschool, Christian College of Applied Sciences, Netherlands, based on the Foundation of the Stenden Hogeschool;

    • -Stenden Hogeschool Drenthe, based on the Foundation Stenden Hogeschool;

    • -STOAS Hogeschool, Wageningen, on the basis of the STOAS Foundation;

    • -From Hall Institute, based on the Foundation Van Hall Larenstein.

  • h. The Open University in Heerlen.

  • i. the philosophical universities of the life:

    • -Protestantse Theological University, Kampen, based on the Protestant Church in the Netherlands;

    • -Theological University of the Christian Reformed Churches in the Netherlands in Apeldoorn, based on the Christian Reformed Churches;

    • -The University of Humanistics in Utrecht, based on the University of Humanistical Foundation.

    • -Theological University, based on the joint legal personality, established Gereformed Churches in the Netherlands (freed) at Kampen.

  • j.

    • 1. The legal personality incumbent academic hospitals at the public universities should:

      • -Leiden,

      • -Groningen,

      • -Amsterdam,

      • -Utrecht,

      • -Rotterdam,

      • Maastricht.

    • 2. The academic hospitals at the special universities in Amsterdam and Nijmegen.